Contents
AV Receiver
NET/USB...................................120
Controlling Other Components....139
Others.........................................154
TX-NR3007
TX-NR5007
Instruction Manual
Thank you for purchasing an Onkyo AV Receiver.
Please read this manual thoroughly before making
connections and plugging in the unit.
Following the instructions in this manual will enable
you to obtain optimum performance and listening
enjoyment from your new AV Receiver.
Please retain this manual for future reference.
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Precautions
1. Recording Copyright—Unless it’s for personal use
only, recording copyrighted material is illegal with-
out the permission of the copyright holder.
For U.S. models
FCC Information for User
CAUTION:
2. AC Fuse—The AC fuse inside the unit is not user-
serviceable. If you cannot turn on the unit, contact
your Onkyo dealer.
The user changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
3. Care—Occasionally you should dust the unit all
over with a soft cloth. For stubborn stains, use a soft
cloth dampened with a weak solution of mild deter-
gent and water. Dry the unit immediately afterwards
with a clean cloth. Don’t use abrasive cloths, thin-
ners, alcohol, or other chemical solvents, because
they may damage the finish or remove the panel let-
tering.
NOTE:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interfer-
ence in a residential installation.
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio fre-
quency energy and, if not installed and used in accor-
dance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there is
no guarantee that interference will not occur in a partic-
ular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television reception, which can
be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the
user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by
one or more of the following measures:
4. Power
WARNING
BEFORE PLUGGING IN THE UNIT FOR THE
FIRST TIME, READ THE FOLLOWING SEC-
TION CAREFULLY.
AC outlet voltages vary from country to country.
Make sure that the voltage in your area meets the
voltage requirements printed on the unit’s rear panel
(e.g., AC 230 V, 50 Hz or AC 120 V, 60 Hz).
The power cord plug is used to disconnect this unit
from the AC power source. Make sure that the plug
is readily operable (easily accessible) at all times.
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
Pressing the [ON/STANDBY] button to select
Standby mode does not fully shutdown the unit. If
you do not intend to use the unit for an extended
period, remove the power cord from the AC outlet.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit dif-
ferent from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV techni-
cian for help.
5. Preventing Hearing Loss
Caution
Excessive sound pressure from earphones and head-
phones can cause hearing loss.
6. Batteries and Heat Exposure
Warning
For Canadian Models
NOTE: THIS CLASS B DIGITAL APPARATUS
COMPLIES WITH CANADIAN ICES-003.
For models having a power cord with a polarized plug:
CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK,
MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT,
FULLY INSERT.
Batteries (battery pack or batteries installed) shall
not be exposed to excessive heat as sunshine, fire or
the like.
7. Never Touch this Unit with Wet Hands—Never
handle this unit or its power cord while your hands
are wet or damp. If water or any other liquid gets
inside this unit, have it checked by your Onkyo
dealer.
Modèle pour les Canadien
REMARQUE: CET APPAREIL NUMÉRIQUE DE
LA CLASSE B EST CONFORME À LA NORME
NMB-003 DU CANADA.
Sur les modèles dont la fiche est polarisée:
ATTENTION: POUR ÉVITER LES CHOCS ÉLEC-
TRIQUES, INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS
LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE CORRE-
SPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER
JUSQU’AU FOND.
8. Handling Notes
• If you need to transport this unit, use the original
packaging to pack it how it was when you origi-
nally bought it.
• Do not leave rubber or plastic items on this unit
for a long time, because they may leave marks on
the case.
• This unit’s top and rear panels may get warm
after prolonged use. This is normal.
• If you do not use this unit for a long time, it may
not work properly the next time you turn it on, so
be sure to use it occasionally.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Supplied Accessories
Precautions—Continued
Make sure you have the following accessories:
For British models
Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power
supply cord of this unit should be performed only by
qualified service personnel.
IMPORTANT
The wires in the mains lead are coloured in accordance
with the following code:
Remote controller & two batteries (AA/R6)
(Note for China: The battery for the remote controller is
not supplied for this unit.)
Blue: Neutral
Brown: Live
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this appa-
ratus may not correspond with the coloured markings
identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as fol-
lows:
Speaker setup microphone
Indoor FM antenna
The wire which is coloured blue must be connected to
the terminal which is marked with the letter N or
coloured black.
The wire which is coloured brown must be connected to
the terminal which is marked with the letter L or
coloured red.
IMPORTANT
The plug is fitted with an appropriate fuse. If the fuse
needs to be replaced, the replacement fuse must
approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362 and have the same
ampere rating as that indicated on the plug. Check for the
ASTA mark or the BSI mark on the body of the fuse.
If the power cord’s plug is not suitable for your socket
outlets, cut it off and fit a suitable plug. Fit a suitable fuse
in the plug.
AM loop antenna
Power cord
(Plug type varies from country to country.)
For European Models
Declaration of Conformity
We,
ONKYO EUROPE
ELECTRONICS GmbH
LIEGNITZERSTRASSE 6,
82194 GROEBENZELL,
GERMANY
Speaker cable labels
declare in own responsibility, that the ONKYO product
described in this instruction manual is in compliance with the
*
corresponding
technical standards such as EN60065,
EN55013, EN55020 and EN61000-3-2, -3-3.
Power-plug adapter
GROEBENZELL, GERMANY
Only supplied in certain countries. Use this adapter if
your AC outlet does not match with the plug on the AV
receiver’s power cord (adapter varies from country to
country).
K. MIYAGI
ONKYO EUROPE ELECTRONICS GmbH
*How to mount the AC plug:
*
In catalogs and on packaging, the letter at the end of the product
name indicates the color. Specifications and operations are the
same regardless of color.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Universal Port Option UP-A1 Dock for iPod ................... 77
Recording ....................................................................... 80
Introduction
Rear Panel..................................................................11
Remote Controller...........................................................14
Assigning Listening Modes to Input Sources............ 109
Connection
Connecting Both Audio & Video..................................32
Connecting a CD Player or Turntable.........................43
Connecting a Cassette, CDR, MiniDisc, or DAT Recorder ..44
Connecting the AV Receiver .................................... 120
Connecting Zone 2 ................................................... 131
Connecting Zone 3 ................................................... 133
Digital Audio Input Setup ............................................56
Analog Audio Input Setup ...........................................57
Speaker Settings.........................................................57
Resetting REMOTE MODE Buttons......................... 142
Controlling a CD Player, CD Recorder or
MD Recorder.......................................................... 147
Basic Operations
Selecting Speaker Layout...........................................70
Using Headphones .....................................................70
Using Easy Macros.....................................................71
Listening to the Radio.....................................................73
Using the Tuner ..........................................................73
Presetting AM/FM Stations .........................................74
Using RDS (European models)...................................75
Others
Specifications (TX-NR5007)......................................... 161
Video Resolution Chart................................................. 162
*
To reset the AV receiver to its factory defaults, turn it
on and, while holding down the [VCR/DVR] button,
press the [ON/STANDBY] button (see page 154).
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Features
*8
• SIRIUS Satellite Radio Connectivity (North Ameri-
Amplifier
can models)
• Banana Plug-Compatible Speaker Posts
• Powered Zone 2/3
• Internet Radio* Connectivity (SIRIUS Internet
Radio /vTuner/Last.fm/Pandora/Rhapsody)
* Services available may vary depending on the
region.
• Network Capability for Streaming Audio Files
• Bi-Amping and BTL Capability
• USB Port for a USB Mass Storage Device (Audio
Only)
(TX-NR3007)
*7
• 140 Watts/Channel @ 8 ohms (FTC)
• 200 Watts/Channel @ 6 ohms (IEC)
• 250 Watts/Channel @ 6 ohms (JEITA)
(TX-NR5007)
• 145 Watts/Channel @ 8 ohms (FTC)
• 220 Watts/Channel @ 6 ohms (IEC)
• 280 Watts/Channel @ 6 ohms (JEITA)
*8
• WRAT–Wide Range Amplifier Technology
(5 Hz-100 kHz bandwidth)
• Linear Optimum Gain Volume Circuitry
• 3-Step Inverted Darlington Circuitry
• H.C.P.S. (High Current Power Supply) Massive High
Power Transformer
Miscellaneous
*8
• 40 SIRIUS /AM/FM Presets (North American mod-
els)
• Toroidal transformer (TX-NR5007)
• 40 AM/FM Presets (European and Asian models)
*3
• Dolby Volume
• Audyssey MultEQ XT to Correct Room Acoustic
Problems
®
*9
Processing
*1
• THX Ultra2 Plus Certified
*9
• Audyssey Dynamic EQ™ for Loudness Correction
• HQV-Reon-VX Video Processing with 1080p Video
Upscaling of All Video Sources via HDMI
*9
• Audyssey Dynamic Volume™
• Crossover Adjustment
• HDMI ver.1.3a with (Deep Color, x.v.Color, Lip Sync,
*2
*3
(40/50/60/70/80/90/100/120/150/200 Hz)
• A/V Sync Control Function (up to 250 ms)
• Bi-Directional Preprogrammed (with onscreen dis-
play setup) RI-Compatible Learning Remote with 4
Activities and Mode-Key LEDs
DTS -HD Master Audio, Dolby TrueHD , DSD and
Multi-CH PCM)
*3
• Dolby Pro Logic IIz – New Surround Format (front-
high)
*9
• Audyssey Dynamic Surround Expansion™ forNew
• ISF (Imaging Science Foundation) Video Calibration
Surround Channels (front-wide/front-high)
• DTS Surround Sensation Speaker/Headphone Tech-
*2
nology
*1.
• 4 DSP Modes for Gaming; Rock/Sports/Action/RPG
• Non-Scaling Configuration
THX and Ultra2 Plus are trademarks of THX Ltd. THX may be
registered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved. Surround
EX is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories. Used with permission.
*2.
• Direct Mode and Pure Audio Mode
*4
• Music Optimizer for Digital Music Files
• A-Form Listening Mode Memory
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s: 5,451,942;
5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,226,616; 6,487,535;
7,212,872; 7,333,929; 7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other U.S. and
worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS is a registered trade-
mark & the DTS logos, Symbol, DTS-HD Master Audio and
DTS Surround Sensation are trademarks of DTS, Inc.
©1996-2008 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
• Latest Burr-Brown 192 kHz/32-Bit DACs Improve
Jitter Performance for Cleaner Sound (TX-NR5007)
• Burr-Brown 192 kHz/24-Bit DACs Improve Jitter
Performance for Cleaner Sound (TX-NR3007)
• Three TI (Aureus) 32-bit Processing DSP
*10
*3.
• Neural Surround Decoding
• DSD Direct
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”,
“Pro Logic”, “Surround EX” and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Connections
*5
*4. Music Optimizer™ is a trademark of Onkyo Corporation.
• 7 HDMI Inputs and 2 Outputs (TX-NR3007)
*5
*5.
• 8 HDMI Inputs and 2 Outputs (TX-NR5007)
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High Definition Multimedia Inter-
face are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licens-
ing, LLC.
• Onkyo
for System Control
• 6 Digital Inputs (3 Optical/3 Coaxial) (TX-NR3007)
• 7 Digital Inputs (4 Optical/3 Coaxial) (TX-NR5007)
• Universal Port for UP-A1 (Dock for the iPod)/HD
*6
Radio™ tuner module (North American models)/
DAB+ tuner module (European models)
• 2 Independent Subwoofer Pre Outs
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Features—Continued
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that
is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property
rights. Use of this copyright protection technology must be
authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for
home and other limited consumer uses only unless otherwise
authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassem-
bly is prohibited.
*6.
HD Radio™ and the HD Radio Ready logo are proprietary
trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corporation.
To receive HD Radio broadcasts, you must install an Onkyo
UP-HT1 HD Radio tuner module (sold separately).
*7. In Europe, using banana plugs to connect speakers to an audio
amplifier is prohibited.
*8.
SIRIUS, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of
Sirius XM Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. All other marks and
logos are the property of their respective owners. All rights
reserved. SIRIUS and XM subscriptions sold separately. Taxes
and a one-time activation fee may apply. XM tuners and home
docks or SIRIUS tuners (each sold separately) are required to
receive the SIRIUS or XM satellite radio service. All program-
ming and fees subject to change. It is prohibited to copy, decom-
pile, disassemble, reverse engineer, hack, manipulate or
otherwise make available any technology or software incorpo-
rated in receivers compatible with the SIRIUS or XM Satellite
Radio Systems. Service not available in Alaska and Hawaii.
*9.
Manufactured under license from Audyssey Laboratories. U.S.
®
and foreign patents pending. Audyssey MultEQ XT,
Audyssey Dynamic Surround Expansion™,
Audyssey Dynamic Volume™ and Audyssey Dynamic EQ™
are trademarks of Audyssey Laboratories.
*10.
Neural Surround is a trademark owned by Neural Audio Corpo-
ration, THX is a trademark of THX Ltd., which may be regis-
tered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved.
THX Ultra2 Plus
Before any home theater component can be THX
Ultra2 Plus certified, it must pass a rigorous series of
quality and performance tests. Only then can a product
feature the THX Ultra2 Plus logo, which is your guar-
antee that the Home Theater products you purchase will
give you superb performance for many years to come.
THX Ultra2 Plus requirements define hundreds of
parameters, including power amplifier performance,
and pre-amplifier performance and operation for both
digital and analog domains. THX Ultra2 Plus receivers
also feature proprietary THX technologies (e.g., THX
Mode) which accurately translate movie soundtracks
for home theater playback.
*
*
*
“Xantech” is a registered trademark of Xantech Corporation.
“Niles” is a registered trademark of Niles Audio Corporation.
Apple and iPod are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries.
*
*
“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
Rhapsody and the Rhapsody logo are registered trademarks of
RealNetworks, Inc.
®
*
*
“DLNA , the DLNA Logo and DLNA CERTIFIED™ are
trademarks, service marks, or certification marks of the Digital
Living Network Alliance.”
Re-Equalization and the “Re-EQ” logo are trademarks of THX
Ltd.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Front & Rear Panels
Front Panel
a
bcdef
g
h
i
the flap
Front flap
The actual front panel has various logos printed on it. They are not shown here for clarity.
a ON/STANDBY button (48)
This button is used to set the AV receiver to On or
Standby.
receiver to –Q dB, –81.5 dB through +18.0 dB (rel-
ative display).
b STANDBY indicator (48)
The volume level can also be displayed as an abso-
lute value. See “Volume Setup” on page 110.
Lights when the AV receiver is in Standby mode,
and it flashes while a signal is being received from
the remote controller.
i PURE AUDIO button (81)
Selects the Pure Audio listening mode. Pressing this
button again selects the previous listening mode.
c ZONE 2 indicator (136)
Lights when Zone 2 is selected.
d ZONE 3 indicator (136)
Lights when Zone 3 is selected.
e Input selector buttons (67)
These buttons are used to select from the following
input sources: DVD/BD, VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT,
GAME, AUX 1, AUX 2, TV/TAPE, TUNER, CD,
PHONO, PORT, NET/USB.
The sensor receives control signals from the remote
controller. The transmitter transmits setting data to
the remote controller.
g Display
See “Display” on page 10.
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Front & Rear Panels—Continued
(North American models)
j
k lm n o pqr
s
tu vw
x
y z
(European and Asian models)
A
p
The page numbers in parentheses show where you can find the main explanation for each item.
j PHONES jack (70)
p DIMMER button (69)
This 1/4-inch phone jack is for connecting a stan-
dard pair of stereo headphones for private listening.
(North American models)
This button is used to adjust the display brightness.
The [ZONE 2] button is used to select Zone 2.
The [ZONE 3] button is used to select Zone 3.
The [OFF] button is used to turn off Zone 2 or
Zone 3.
RT/PTY/TP button (75)
(European and Asian models)
This button is used for RDS (Radio Data System).
The [RT/PTY/TP] button does not work in areas
where RDS broadcasts are not available. See “Using
RDS (European models)” on page 75.
l TONE button (68, 137)
Used to select the tone (bass and treble) for the main
room, and the tone and balance for Zone 2 or
Zone 3.
q MEMORY button (74)
This button is used when storing or deleting radio
presets.
m LEVEL button (137)
r TUNING MODE button (73)
This button is used to select the Auto or Manual
tuning mode.
Used to select the volume level of Zone 2 or Zone 3.
n MONITOR OUT button (49)
Used to set the “Monitor Out” setting.
buttons
o LISTENING MODE buttons (81)
When the AM or FM input source is selected, the
TUNING [q]/[w] buttons are used to tune the tuner,
and the PRESET [e]/[r] buttons are used to select
radio presets (see pages 74 and 76).
MOVIE/TV:
Selects the listening modes intended for use with
movies and TV.
MUSIC:
When the onscreen setup menus are used, they work
as arrow buttons and are used to select and set
items. The [ENTER] button is also used with the
onscreen setup menus.
Selects the listening modes intended for use with
music.
GAME:
Selects the listening modes intended for use with
video games.
t SETUP button
This button is used to access the onscreen setup
menus that appear on the connected TV.
THX:
Selects the THX listening modes.
u RETURN button
This button is used to return to the previously dis-
played onscreen setup menu.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Front & Rear Panels—Continued
v SETUP MIC jack (62)
y Up [r] and Down [e] buttons (68, 137)
Used to adjust the tone (bass and treble) for the
main room and the volume, tone and balance for
Zone 2 or Zone 3.
®
Audyssey MultEQ XT Room Correction and
Speaker Setup microphone connects here.
w USB port (127)
A USB mass storage device, such as a USB flash
drive or MP3 player, containing music files can be
plugged in here and the music selected can be
played through the AV receiver.
z DISPLAY button (68)
This button is used to display various information
about the currently selected input source.
A POWER switch (48)
x AUX 1 INPUT (42)
(European and Asian models)
This input can be used to connect a camcorder,
game console, and so on. There are jacks for com-
posite video, analog audio, and optical digital audio.
This is the main power switch. When set to OFF,
the AV receiver is completely shutdown. It must be
set to ON to set the AV receiver to On or Standby.
AUX 1 INPUT HDMI (31)
Used to connect an HD camcorder etc.
Display
a bcd e
f
m
g
n
h
op
i j
k
l
For detailed information, see the pages in parentheses.
a Speaker/channel indicators
Indicate the speaker channels used by the current
listening mode.
e Listening mode and format indicators (81)
Show the selected listening mode and audio input
signal format.
The following abbreviations indicate which audio
channels are outputted for the current listening
mode.
Audyssey (61, 98):
rection and Speaker Setup. Lights when the “Equal-
Audyssey Dynamic Surround Expansion™ listen-
ing mode is selected.
®
LW: Front wide left
LH: Front high left
RH: Front high right
RW: Front wide right
FL: Front left
Dynamic EQ (102):
Lights when “Dynamic EQ” is enabled.
C:
Center
Vol (102, 118):
Lights when “Dynamic Volume” is enabled.
FR: Front right
SL: Surround left
SR: Surround right
SBL: Surround back left
SB: Surround back
Vol (101, 118):
Lights when “Dolby Volume” is enabled.
f NETWORK indicator (121)
Lights when the Net input selector is selected.
SBR: Surround back right
b Z2 indicator (136)
Lights when Powered Zone 2 is being used.
c A and B indicators (70)
Indicate which speaker set is selected: A or B.
d Z3 indicator (136)
Lights when Powered Zone 3 is being used.
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Front & Rear Panels—Continued
g Tuning indicators
j BTL indicator (24, 26)
Lights when the “Speakers Type(FrontA)” or
“Speakers Type(FrontB)” setting is set to “BTL” for
bridged front speaker operation.
RDS (European models) (75):
Lights when tuned to a radio station that supports
k Headphone indicator (70)
Lights when a pair of headphones are plugged into
the PHONES jack.
AUTO (73):
or FM radio. Goes off when Manual Tuning mode is
selected.
l Message area
TUNED (73):
Displays various information.
Lights when tuned to a radio station.
m USB indicator (128)
Lights up when a USB mass storage device is
detected.
FM STEREO (73):
Lights when tuned to a stereo FM station.
h SLEEP indicator (69)
n Volume level (67)
Lights when the Sleep function has been set.
Displays the volume level.
i Bi AMP indicator (23, 25)
Lights when the “Speakers Type(FrontA)” or
“Speakers Type(FrontB)” setting is set to
“Bi-Amp”.
o MUTING indicator (69)
Flashes while the AV receiver is muted.
p Audio input indicators
Indicate the type of audio input that’s selected as the
audio source: HDMI, ANALOG, or DIGITAL.
Rear Panel
(TX-NR5007)
* North American models
a
b
c
d e
f
g h i
j
k
l
m
n
o
p q r s t u v w x y
D*
B C
z
A
A commercially available IR emitter can be con-
nected to the IR OUT jack to pass IR (infrared)
remote control signals through to other components.
a UNIVERSAL PORT
This port is for connecting the component with the
Universal Port option such as UP-A1 Dock.
c DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1 and 2 (TX-NR3007)
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1, 2, and 3 (TX-NR5007)
These optical digital audio inputs are for connecting
components with optical digital audio outputs, such
as CD and DVD/BD players. They’re assignable,
which means you can assign each one to an input
selector to suit your setup. See “Digital Audio Input
Setup” on page 56.
b IR IN/OUT
A commercially available IR receiver can be con-
nected to the IR IN jack, allowing you to control the
AV receiver while you’re in Zone 2/3, or control it
when it’s out of sight, for example, installed in a
cabinet.
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Front & Rear Panels—Continued
d DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 1, 2, and 3
ing components with coaxial digital audio outputs,
such as CD and DVD/BD players. They’re assign-
able, which means you can assign each one to an
input selector to suit your setup. See “Digital Audio
Input Setup” on page 56.
These RCA component video outputs are for con-
necting a TV or projector with a component video
input.
m ZONE 2 OUT
This composite video output can be connected to a
video input on a TV in Zone 2.
e USB port (TX-NR5007)
n FM ANTENNA
A USB mass storage device, such as a USB flash
drive or MP3 player, containing music files can be
plugged in here and the music selected can be
played through the AV receiver.
This jack is for connecting an FM antenna.
AM ANTENNA
These push terminals are for connecting an AM
antenna.
f ETHERNET
o AC INLET
This port is for connecting the AV receiver to your
Ethernet network (e.g., router or switch) for playing
music files on a networked computer or media
server, or for listening to Internet radio.
The supplied power cord is connected here. The
other end of the power cord should be connected to
a suitable wall outlet.
p GND screw
g u REMOTE CONTROL
This screw is for connecting a turntable’s ground
wire.
This u (Remote Interactive) jack can be con-
nected to an u jack on another Onkyo AV compo-
nent. The AV receiver’s remote controller can then
be used to control that component. To use u, you
must make an analog audio connection (RCA)
between the AV receiver and the other AV compo-
nent, even if they are connected digitally.
q PHONO IN
These analog audio inputs are for connecting a turn-
table.
r CD IN
These analog audio inputs are for connecting a CD
player’s analog audio output.
h RS232
Terminal for control.
s 12V TRIGGER OUT ZONE 2
This output can be connected to the 12-volt trigger
input on a component in Zone 2. When Zone 2 is
turned on, a 12-volt trigger signal is output.
i HDMI IN 1–6, OUT MAIN, and OUT SUB
(TX-NR3007)
HDMI IN 1–7, OUT MAIN, and OUT SUB
(TX-NR5007)
12V TRIGGER OUT ZONE 3
This output can be connected to the 12-volt trigger
input on a component in Zone 3. When Zone 3 is
turned on, a 12-volt trigger signal is output.
HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) con-
nections carry digital audio and digital video.
The HDMI inputs are for connecting components
with an HDMI output, such as a DVD player, Blu-
ray Disc Player, DVD recorder, or DVR (digital
video recorder). They’re assignable, which means
you can assign each one to an input selector to suit
your setup. See “HDMI Input Setup” on page 54.
The HDMI outputs are for connecting a TV or pro-
jector with an HDMI input.
t TV/TAPE IN/OUT
These analog audio inputs and outputs are for con-
necting a TV or recorder with an analog audio input
and output (cassette, Mini Disc, etc.).
u AUX 2 IN
This analog audio input is for connecting an analog
audio output, such as an audio device, etc.
j MONITOR OUT
v GAME IN
These S-Video and composite video jacks should be
Here you can connect a game console, etc. Input
jacks include S-Video, composite video, and analog
audio.
connected to a video input on your TV or projector.
k COMPONENT VIDEO IN 1, 2 and 3
These RCA component video inputs are for con-
necting components with a component video out-
put, such as a DVD player, DVD recorder, or DVR
(digital video recorder). They’re assignable, which
means you can assign each one to an input selector
to suit your setup. See “Component Video Input
Setup” on page 55.
Here you can connect a cable/satellite receiver, set-
top box, etc. Input jacks include S-Video, composite
video, and analog audio.
x VCR/DVR IN/OUT
Here you can connect a VCR or DVR (digital video
recorder). Input and output jacks include S-Video,
composite video, and analog audio.
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Front & Rear Panels—Continued
y DVD/BD IN
D SIRIUS antenna
Here you can connect a DVD/BD player. Input
jacks include S-Video, composite video, and analog
audio. You can connect a DVD/BD player’s 2-chan-
nel analog audio output.
This jack is for connecting a SIRIUS Satellite Radio
antenna, sold separately (see the separate SIRIUS
instructions).
z MULTI CH input: FRONT L/R, CENTER,
SUBWOOFER, SURR L/R, and SURR BACK
L/R
See pages 18 to 47 for connection information.
This analog multichannel input is for connecting a
component with a 5.1/7.1-channel analog audio out-
put, such as a DVD player, DVD-Audio or Super
Audio CD-capable player, or an MPEG decoder.
A PRE OUT: FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURR L/R,
SURR BACK L/R, and FRONT HIGH/WIDE
L/R
These multichannel analog audio outputs can be
connected to the analog audio input on a multichan-
nel power amplifier for when you want to use the
AV receiver solely as a preamplifier.
PRE OUT: SW1, SW2
These analog audio outputs can be connected to a
powered subwoofer. You can connect the powered
subwoofer with each jacks respectively. Level and
distance can be set individually for each output.
B PRE OUT: ZONE 2, ZONE 3 L/R
These analog audio outputs can be connected to the
line inputs on amplifiers in Zone 2 and Zone 3.
C FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURR L/R, SURR
BACK/ZONE 3 L/R, FRONT HIGH L/R, and
FRONT WIDE/ZONE 2 L/R
These terminal posts are for connecting the front
L/R, center, surround L/R, surround back/zone 3
L/R, front high L/R, and front wide/zone 2 L/R
speakers.
terminal posts can be used with front speakers A
and surround back speakers respectively, or used to
bi-amp or bridge the front speakers A. See “Bi-amp-
ing the Front Speakers A” on page 23 and “Bridging
the Front Speakers A” on page 24.
with front speakers B and surround back speakers
respectively, or used to biamp or bridge the front
speakers B. See “Bi-amping the Front Speakers B”
page 26.
The FRONT WIDE/ZONE 2 L/R terminals can be
used with front wide speakers respectively, or used
See “Connecting Zone 2” on page 131.
The SURR BACK/ZONE 3 L/R terminals can be
used with surround speakers respectively, or used to
connect the speakers in Zone 3.
See “Connecting Zone 3” on page 133.
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Controller
Installing the Batteries
Aiming the Remote Controller
To use the remote controller, point it at the AV receiver’s
remote control sensor, as shown below.
To open the battery compartment, press
the small lever and remove the cover.
1
Transmission
Remote control sensor
AV receiver
Approx. 16 ft. (5 m)
30° off center
(Left/Right/Up/Down)
Insert the two supplied batteries (AA/R6)
in accordance with the polarity diagram
inside the battery compartment.
2
Received
Transmitter
AV receiver
Incoming sensor
15
15
Replace the cover and push it shut.
3
15° off center
Approx. 16 ft. (5 m)
(Left/Right/Up/Down)
Notes:
• The remote controller may not work reliably if the AV
receiver is subjected to bright light, such as direct sun-
light or inverter-type fluorescent lights. Keep this in
mind when installing.
• If another remote controller of the same type is used in
the same room, or the AV receiver is installed close to
equipment that uses infrared rays, the remote control-
ler may not work reliably.
• Don’t put anything, such as a book, on the remote con-
troller, because the buttons may be pressed inadvert-
ently, thereby draining the batteries.
• The remote controller may not work reliably if the AV
receiver is installed in a rack behind colored glass
doors. Keep this in mind when installing.
Notes:
• If the remote controller doesn’t work reliably, try
replacing the batteries.
• Don’t mix new and old batteries or different types of
batteries.
• If you intend not to use the remote controller for a long
time, remove the batteries to prevent damage from
leakage or corrosion.
• Expired batteries should be removed as soon as possi-
ble to prevent damage from leakage or corrosion.
obstacle between it and the AV receiver’s remote con-
trol sensor.
• When the remote control codes have been registered
and you want to operate another component
component without u connection, point the remote
controller at the other component to use it.
• When you want to operate an Onkyo component with
u connection or an
-compatible compo-
nent connected via HDMI (pages 143 and 144), point
the remote controller at the AV receiver’s remote con-
trol sensor.
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Controller—Continued
Controlling the AV Receiver
For detailed information, see the pages in parentheses.
To control the AV receiver, press the [RECEIVER]
button to select Receiver mode.
You can also use the remote controller to control your
DVD/BD player, CD player, and other components.
See page 141 for more details.
a STANDBY button (48)
Sets the AV receiver to Standby.
b ON button (48)
Turns on the AV receiver.
c ACTIVITIES buttons (71, 153)
Used with the MACRO function.
d REMOTE MODE/INPUT SELECTOR buttons
(67, 143 to 149)
a
j
b
c
Selects the remote controller modes and the input
sources.
3
e SP LAYOUT button (70)
d
This button is used to change the speaker selection:
Front High speakers or Front Wide speakers .
*2
Speakers A or Speakers B.
*2 If you use surround back speakers, you can select the combina-
tion of surround back and front high, or surround back and
front wide speakers.
*1
k
l
f Arrow [q]/[w]/[e]/[r] and ENTER buttons
Used to select and adjust settings.
4
m
g SETUP button
e
f
g
Used to change settings.
h LISTENING MODE buttons (81)
1
Used to select the listening modes.
n
o
i DIMMER button (69)
Adjusts the display brightness.
j DISPLAY button (68)
Displays information about the current input source.
k MUTING button (69)
Mutes or unmutes the AV receiver.
h
i
l VOL [q]/[w] button (67)
Adjusts the volume of the AV receiver regardless of
the currently selected remote controller mode.
5
m VIDEO button (49, 53, 105)
Used to change video settings.
n RETURN button
p
2
Returns to the previous display when changing set-
tings.
o AUDIO button (117)
Used to change audio settings.
When the “Audio TV Out” setting is set to “On”
(page 113), this button is disabled.
p SLEEP button (69)
Used with the Sleep function.
*1 When you want to change the remote controller mode without
changing the current input source, press the [MODE] button and
within about eight seconds, press the REMOTE MODE button.
Then, with the AV receiver’s remote controller, you can control
the component corresponding to the button you pressed.
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Controller—Continued
■ Controlling the tuner
To control the AV receiver’s tuner, press the [TUNER]
(or [RECEIVER]) button.
ton repeatedly.
1 Arrow [q]/[w] buttons
Used to tune into radio stations.
2 D.TUN button (73)
(TUNER remote mode only)
Selects the Direct tuning mode.
3 DISPLAY button
preset number, and so on.
4 CH +/– button (74)
Used to select radio presets.
5 Number buttons (73, 74)
Used to select radio stations directly in the Direct
tuning mode. Also you can select a preset directly.
Note:
An Onkyo cassette recorder connected via u can also
be controlled in Receiver mode (see page 149).
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About Home Theater
Enjoying Home Theater
Thanks to the AV receiver’s superb capabilities, you can enjoy surround sound with a real sense of movement in your
own home—just like being in a movie theater or concert hall. With DVDs you can enjoy DTS and Dolby Digital. With
analog or digital TV, you can enjoy Dolby Pro Logic IIx, DTS Neo:6, or Onkyo’s original DSP listening modes.
You can also enjoy THX Surround EX (THX-certified THX speaker system recommended).
Front left and right speakers
These output the overall sound. Their role in a home theater is to provide
a solid anchor for the sound image. They should be positioned facing the
listener at about ear level, and equidistant from the TV. Angle them inward
so as to create a triangle, with the listener at the apex.
Front wide left and right speakers
These speakers are necessary to enjoy
Audyssey Dynamic Surround Expansion™
(DSX). They significantly enhance the spatial
experience. Position them well outside of the
front left and right speakers. See also
about optimum speaker placement for
Audyssey Dynamic Surround Expansion™.
Front high left and right speakers
These speakers are necessary to enjoy Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height,
and Audyssey Dynamic Surround Expansion™.
They significantly enhance the spatial experience.
Position them at least 3.3 feet (100 cm) above the front left and
right speakers (preferably as high as possible) and at an angle
slightly wider than the front left and right speakers.
Center speaker
This speaker enhances the
front left and right speakers,
making sound movements dis-
tinct and providing a full sound
image. In movies it’s used
mainly for dialog.
Position it close to your TV fac-
ing forward at about ear level, or
at the same height as the front
left and right speakers.
Surround back left and right speakers
These speakers are necessary to enjoy Dolby Digital
EX, DTS-ES Matrix, DTS-ES Discrete, THX Surround
EX, etc. They enhance the realism of surround sound
and improve sound localization behind the listener.
Position them behind the listener about 2 to 3 feet (60
to 100 cm) above ear level.
Subwoofer
The subwoofer handles the bass sounds
of the LFE (Low-Frequency Effects)
channel. The volume and quality of the
bass output from your subwoofer will
depend on its position, the shape of your
listening room, and your listening posi-
tion. In general, a good bass sound can
be obtained by installing the subwoofer
in a front corner, or at one-third the width
of the wall, as shown.
Surround left and right speakers
These speakers are used for precise sound positioning and to add
realistic ambience.
Position them at the sides of the listener, or slightly behind, about 2 to
3 feet (60 to 100 cm) above ear level. Ideally they should be equidis-
tant from the listener.
Tip: To find the best position for your
subwoofer, while playing a movie or
some music with good bass, experiment
by placing your subwoofer at various
positions within the room, and choose
the one that provides the most satisfying
results.
Corner
position
1/3 of wall
position
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting the AV receiver
Connecting Your Speakers
About Speakers A and Speakers B
Speakers A and Speakers B allows you to have two speaker configurations of up to 7.2 speakers. Each configuration has
its own pair of stereo front speakers and can use the same subwoofer, center, surround, and surround back speakers, as
required. You could, for example, use Speakers A when watching a DVD movie with 7.2-channels surround sound and
use Speakers B for serious music listening with a pair of stereo speakers (2-channels).
The speakers are configured by using the “Speaker Settings” on page 57 and “Speaker Setup” on page 95.
Front Speakers A and front Speakers B can be wired normally, bi-amped, or bridged, but A and B cannot be bi-amped
or bridged at the same time. For example, if front Speakers A are bridged, front Speakers B can only be wired normally.
Similarly, if front Speakers B are bi-amped, Speakers A can only be wired normally. When bridging or bi-amping is
used, the AV receiver can drive up to 5.2 speakers in the main room. See pages 22 to 26 for more information.
The Speakers A and Speakers B configurations are selected by using the [SP LAYOUT] button on the remote controller.
Only one configuration can be selected at a time.
The versatility offered by the Speakers A and Speakers B configurations means you can configure the AV receiver to
suit your exact requirements and application. Two typical applications are shown below.
■ 7.2-channel Playback with Speakers A and
Stereo Playback with Speakers B
■ 5.2-channel Playback with Bridged Front
Speakers
In this example, Speakers A provides 7.2-channel
surround sound for enjoying DVD movies, while
Speakers B is used for serious music listening with a
pair of top-quality stereo speakers.
In this example, Speakers A provides 5.2-channel
surround sound for enjoying DVD movies, while
Speakers B is bridged for use with a pair of high-
power stereo speakers, the subwoofer is used with
Speakers A and Speakers B.
Speakers B
Speakers B
FL
FR
FL
FR
FL
C
FR
FL
C
FR
Speakers A
Subwoofer
used with A
and B
Speakers A
SL
SBL
SR
SBR
SL
SR
2–1. Speaker Settings
2–1. Speaker Settings
Speaker Impedance
Speakers Type(FrontA)
Speakers Type(FrontB)
Powered Zone2
6ohms
Normal
Normal
Not Act
Not Act
Speaker Impedance
Speakers Type(FrontA)
Speakers Type(FrontB)
Powered Zone2
8ohms
Normal
BTL
Not Act
Not Act
Powered Zone3
Powered Zone3
2–2. Speaker Configuration
2–2. Speaker Configuration
Subwoofer
Front
Use
Speaker A
Use
Use
Use
Use
Subwoofer
Front
Use
Use
Use
Use
Not Use
Speaker A
Center
Surround
Surr Back
Center
Surround
Surr Back
2–2. Speaker Configuration
2–2. Speaker Configuration
Subwoofer
Front
Not Use
Speaker B
Use
Not Use
Not Use
Not Use
Subwoofer
Front
Use
Speaker B
Center
Use
Not Use
Not Use
Not Use
Surround
Surr Back
Center
Surround
Surr Back
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting the AV receiver—Continued
Speaker Configuration
For 9.2-channel surround-sound playback, you need nine speakers and two powered subwoofers.
The following table indicates the channels you should use depending on the number of speakers that you have.
Number of speakers:
Front left
2
3
4
5
6
7
7
7
8
8
9
9
9
10
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
11
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
Front right
Center
Surround left
✓
✓
Surround right
Surround back*
Surround back left
Surround back right
Front high left
Front high right
Front wide right
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
*
If you’re using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SURR BACK/ZONE 3 L terminal.
No matter how many speakers you use, two powered subwoofers are recommended for a really powerful and solid bass.
To get the best from your surround sound system, you need to set the speaker settings. You can do this automatically
(see page 61) or manually (see page 95).
Note:
Front high and front wide speakers produce no sound at the same time.
(North American models)
Attaching the Speaker Labels
• If you are using banana plugs, tighten the speaker ter-
The AV receiver’s positive (+) speaker terminals are all
minal before inserting the banana plug.
red (the negative (–) speaker terminals are all black).
• Do not insert the speaker code directly into the center
hole of the speaker terminal.
Speaker
Color
White
Red
Front left
Connecting Powered Subwoofers
Front right
Using a suitable cable, connect the AV receiver’s PRE
OUT: SW1, SW2 to an input on your powered sub-
woofer, as shown. If your subwoofer is unpowered and
you’re using an external amplifier, connect the PRE
OUT: SW1, SW2 to an input on the amp.
You can connect the powered subwoofer with each jacks
respectively. Level and distance can be set individually
for each output. If you use one subwoofer, connect it to
PRE OUT: SW1.
Center
Green
Blue
Surround left
Surround right
Gray
Brown
Tan
Surround back left, Zone 3 left
Surround back right, Zone 3 right
Front high left
White
Red
Front high right
Front wide left, Zone 2 left
Front wide right, Zone 2 right
White
Red
The supplied speaker cable labels are also color-coded
and you should attach them to the positive (+) side of
each speaker cable in accordance with the above table.
Then all you need to do is to match the color of each
label to the corresponding speaker terminal.
Powered subwoofer
LINE INPUT
LINE INPUT
LINE INPUT
LINE INPUT
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting the AV receiver—Continued
Using Dipole Speakers
Speaker Connection Precautions
You can use dipole speakers for the surround left and
right, surround back left and right speakers. Dipole
speakers output the same sound in two directions.
Dipole speakers typically have an arrow printed on them
to indicate how they should be positioned. The surround
left and right dipole speakers should be positioned so
that their arrows point toward the TV/screen, while the
surround back left and right and front high left and right
and front wide left and right dipole speakers should be
positioned so that their arrows point toward each other,
as shown.
• You can connect speakers with an impedance of
between 4 and 16 ohms. If the impedance of any of the
connected speakers is 4 ohms or more, but less than 6
ohms, be sure to set the minimum speaker impedance
to “4ohms” (see page 57). If you use speakers with a
lower impedance, and use the amplifier at high vol-
ume levels for a long period of time, the built-in pro-
tection circuit may be activated.
• Disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet before
making any connections.
• Read the instructions supplied with your speakers.
• Pay close attention to speaker wiring polarity. In other
words, connect positive (+) terminals only to positive
(+) terminals, and negative (–) terminals only to nega-
tive (–) terminals. If you get them the wrong way
around, the sound will be out of phase and will sound
unnatural.
Normal speakers
10
Dipole speakers
10
9
9
1
1
TV/screen
TV/screen
1
1
2
3
4
11
2
3
4
12
11
12
• Unnecessarily long, or very thin speaker cables may
affect the sound quality and should be avoided.
• If you use 4 or 5 speakers, connect each of the two
surround speakers to the SURR L/R terminals. Do not
connect them to the SURR BACK/ZONE 3 L/R,
FRONT WIDE/ZONE 2 L/R, or FRONT HIGH L/R
terminals.
5
6
5
6
7
8
7
8
1. Subwoofers
8. Surround back right
speaker
9. Front high left speaker
10.Front high right speaker
11.Front wide left speaker
12.Front wide right speaker
• Be careful not to short the
positive and negative wires.
Doing so may damage the AV
receiver.
• Make sure the metal core of
the wire does not have contact
with the AV receiver’s rear
2. Front left speaker
3. Center speaker
4. Front right speaker
5. Surround left speaker
6. Surround right speaker
7. Surround back left
speaker
panel. Doing so may damage the AV receiver.
• Don’t connect more than one cable to each speaker
terminal. Doing so may damage the AV receiver.
• Don’t connect one speaker to several terminals.
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting the AV receiver—Continued
Connecting the Speaker Cables
1/2" to 5/8"
(12 to 15 mm)
Strip 1/2" to 5/8" (12 to
15 mm) of insulation
from the ends of the
speaker cables, and
twist the bare wires
tightly, as shown.
Fully insert the bare
wires.
1
3
4
Screw the terminal tight.
Unscrew the terminal.
2
■ 9.2-channel Playback with Speakers A
The following illustration shows which speaker should be connected to each pair of terminals. If you’re using only one
surround back speaker, connect it to the SURR BACK/ZONE 3 L terminal.
Front high
right
speaker
Front wide
right
speaker
Front high
left
speaker
Front right
speaker A
Front left
speaker A
Front wide left
speaker
Center
speaker
Surround
right
speaker
Surround
back right
speaker
Surround
back left
speaker
Surround
left
speaker
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting the AV receiver—Continued
■ 7.2-channel Playback with Speakers A or Speakers B
The following illustration shows which speaker should be connected to each pair of terminals for up to 7.2-channel
playback with Speakers A or Speakers B. If you’re using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SURR
BACK/ZONE 3 L terminal.
Front right
speaker B
Front right
speaker A
Front left
speaker A
Front left
speaker B
Center
speaker
Surround
right
speaker
Surround
back right
speaker
Surround
back left
speaker
Surround
left
speaker
Notes:
• When Speakers A is selected as the main front speakers, connect the front left speaker to FRONT L, front right
speaker to FRONT R. When Speakers B is selected as the main front speakers, connect the front left speaker to
FRONT WIDE/ZONE 2 L, front right speaker to FRONT WIDE/ZONE 2 R.
• The speakers are configured by using the “Speaker Settings” on page 57 and “Speaker Setup” on page 95.
• You can choose which of the spakers you want to use with the Speakers A or Speakers B configuration (see page 96).
• When you use the Speakers B configuration, front high speakers cannnot be used.
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting the AV receiver—Continued
Bi-amping Speaker Hookup
Bi-amping the Front Speakers A
The FRONT L/R and SURR BACK/ZONE 3 L/R termi-
nal posts can be used with front speakers and surround
back speakers respectively, or bi-amped to provide sepa-
rate tweeter and woofer feeds for a pair of front speakers
A that support bi-amping, providing improved bass and
treble performance.
Connect the AV receiver’s FRONT R positive (+)
1
terminal to the right speaker’s positive (+) Woofer
(low) terminal. And connect the AV receiver’s
FRONT R negative (–) terminal to the right
speaker’s negative (–) Woofer (low) terminal.
• When bi-amping is used, surround back speakers can-
not be used.
• For bi-amping, the FRONT L/R terminal posts con-
nect to the front speakers’ woofer terminals. And the
SURR BACK/ZONE 3 L/R terminal posts connect to
the front speakers’ tweeter terminals.
Connect the AV receiver’s SURR BACK/ZONE 3
2
R positive (+) terminal to the right speaker’s pos-
itive (+) Tweeter (high) terminal. And connect the
AV receiver’s SURR BACK/ZONE 3 R negative
(–) terminal to the right speaker’s negative (–)
Tweeter (high) terminal.
• Once you’ve completed the bi-amping connections
shown below and turned on the AV receiver, you must
set the “Speakers Type(FrontA)” setting to “Bi-Amp”
to enable biamping (see page 57).
• When front Speakers A are biamped, front Speakers B
must be wired normally or not used.
Connect the AV receiver’s FRONT L positive (+)
3
terminal to the left speaker’s positive (+) Woofer
(low) terminal. And connect the AV receiver’s
FRONT L negative (–) terminal to the left
speaker’s negative (–) Woofer (low) terminal.
Important:
Connect the AV receiver’s SURR BACK/ZONE 3
• When making the bi-amping connections, be sure
to remove the jumper bars that link the Speakers’
tweeter (high) and woofer (low) terminals.
• Bi-amping can only be used with speakers that support
bi-amping. Refer to your speaker manual.
4
L positive (+) terminal to the left speaker’s posi-
tive (+) Tweeter (high) terminal. And connect the
AV receiver’s SURR BACK/ZONE 3 L negative
(–) terminal to the left speaker’s negative (–)
Tweeter (high) terminal.
Tweeter (high)
Tweeter (high)
Woofer (low)
Left speaker
Woofer (low)
Right speaker
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting the AV receiver—Continued
Bridged Speaker Hookup
Bridging the Front Speakers A
The FRONT L/R and SURR BACK/ZONE 3 L/R ter-
minal posts can be used with front speakers and surround
back speakers respectively, or bridged together to pro-
vide almost double the output power for the front
speakers A.
Connect the AV receiver’s FRONT R positive (+)
1
terminal to the right speaker’s positive (+) ter-
minal. And connect the AV receiver’s SURR
BACK/ZONE 3 R positive (+) terminal to the
right speaker’s negative (–) terminal.
• When bridging is used, surround back speakers cannot
be used.
Connect the AV receiver’s FRONT L positive (+)
terminal to the left speaker’s positive (+) terminal.
And connect the AV receiver’s SURR
BACK/ZONE 3 L positive (+) terminal to the left
speaker’s negative (–) terminal.
2
• For bridging, the positive (+) FRONT L/R and SURR
BACK/ZONE 3 L/R terminal posts are used, but the
L/R terminals are not.
• Once you’ve completed the bridging connections
shown below and turned on the AV receiver, you must
set the “Speakers Type(FrontA)” setting to “BTL” to
enable bridging (see page 57).
• When front Speakers A are bridged, front Speakers B
must be wired normally or not used.
Notes:
• Use only front speakers with an impedance of 8
ohms or higher for bridging. Failure to do so may
seriously damage the AV receiver.
• When using bridging, make sure that your front speak-
ers can handle the additional power.
Right speaker
Left speaker
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting the AV receiver—Continued
Bi-amping Speaker Hookup
Bi-amping the Front Speakers B
The FRONT WIDE/ZONE 2 L/R and SURR
BACK/ZONE 3 L/R terminal posts can be used with
front wide speakers and surround back speakers respec-
tively, or bi-amped to provide separate tweeter and
woofer feeds for a pair of front speakers B that support
bi-amping, providing improved bass and treble perfor-
mance.
Connect the AV receiver’s FRONT
1
WIDE/ZONE 2 R positive (+) terminal to the
right speaker’s positive (+) Woofer (low) termi-
nal. And connect the AV receiver’s FRONT
WIDE/ZONE 2 R negative (–) terminal to the
right speaker’s negative (–) Woofer (low) termi-
nal.
• When bi-amping is used, surround back speakers can-
not be used.
Connect the AV receiver’s SURR BACK/ZONE 3
2
• For bi-amping, the FRONT WIDE/ZONE 2 L/R ter-
minal posts connect to the front speakers’ woofer ter-
posts connect to the front speakers’ tweeter terminals.
• Once you’ve completed the bi-amping connections
shown below and turned on the AV receiver, you must
set the “Speakers Type(FrontB)” setting to “Bi-Amp”
to enable biamping (see page 57).
R positive (+) terminal to the right speaker’s pos-
itive (+) Tweeter (high) terminal. And connect the
AV receiver’s SURR BACK/ZONE 3 R negative
(–) terminal to the right speaker’s negative (–)
Tweeter (high) terminal.
Connect the AV receiver’s FRONT
3
WIDE/ZONE 2 L positive (+) terminal to the left
speaker’s positive (+) Woofer (low) terminal. And
connect the AV receiver’s FRONT
• When front Speakers B are biamped, front Speakers A
must be wired normally.
WIDE/ZONE 2 L negative (–) terminal to the left
speaker’s negative (–) Woofer (low) terminal.
Important:
• When making the bi-amping connections, be sure
to remove the jumper bars that link the Speaker’s
tweeter (high) and woofer (low) terminals.
• Bi-amping can only be used with speakers that support
bi-amping. Refer to your speaker manual.
Connect the AV receiver’s SURR BACK/ZONE 3
4
L positive (+) terminal to the left speaker’s posi-
tive (+) Tweeter (high) terminal. And connect the
AV receiver’s SURR BACK/ZONE 3 L negative
(–) terminal to the left speaker’s negative (–)
Tweeter (high) terminal.
Tweeter (high)
Tweeter (high)
Woofer (low)
Left speaker
Woofer (low)
Right speaker
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting the AV receiver—Continued
Bridged Speaker Hookup
Bridging the Front Speakers B
The FRONT WIDE/ZONE 2 L/R and SURR
BACK/ZONE 3 L/R terminal posts can be used with
front wide speakers and surround back speakers respec-
tively, or bridged together to provide almost double the
output power for the front speakers B.
Connect the AV receiver’s FRONT
1
WIDE/ZONE 2 R positive (+) terminal to the
right speaker’s positive (+) terminal. And connect
the AV receiver’s SURR BACK/ZONE 3 R posi-
tive (+) terminal to the right speaker’s negative
(–) terminal.
• When bridging is used, surround back speakers cannot
be used.
• For bridging, the positive (+) FRONT WIDE/ZONE 2
L/R and SURR BACK/ZONE 3 L/R terminal posts
L/R and SURR BACK/ZONE 3 L/R terminals are not.
Connect the AV receiver’s FRONT
2
WIDE/ZONE 2 L positive (+) terminal to the left
speaker’s positive (+) terminal. And connect the
AV receiver’s SURR BACK/ZONE 3 L positive
(+) terminal to the left speaker’s negative (–) ter-
minal.
• Once you’ve completed the bridging connections
shown below and turned on the AV receiver, you must
set the “Speakers Type(FrontB)” setting to “BTL” to
enable bridging (see page 57).
• When front Speakers B are bridged, front Speakers A
must be wired normally.
Notes:
• Use only front speakers with an impedance of 8
ohms or higher for bridging. Failure to do so may
seriously damage the AV receiver.
• When using bridging, make sure that your front speak-
ers can handle the additional power.
Right speaker
Left speaker
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting the AV receiver—Continued
If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied
indoor FM antenna, try a commercially available out-
door FM antenna instead (see page 28).
Connecting Antenna
This section explains how to connect the supplied indoor
FM antenna and AM loop antenna, and how to connect
commercially available outdoor FM and AM antennas.
The AV receiver won’t pick up any radio signals without
any antenna connected, so you must connect the antenna
to use the tuner.
Connecting the AM Loop Antenna
The supplied indoor AM loop antenna is for indoor use
only.
AM ANTENNA push terminals
FM ANTENNA jack
Assemble the AM loop antenna, inserting
the tabs into the base, as shown.
1
Connect both wires of the AM loop
antenna to the AM antenna push termi-
nals, as shown.
2
Connecting the Indoor FM Antenna
The supplied indoor FM antenna is for indoor use only.
(The antenna’s wires are not polarity sensitive, so
they can be connected either way around.)
Make sure that the wires are attached securely and
that the push terminals are gripping the bare
wires, not the insulation.
Attach the FM antenna, as shown.
1
(North American models)
Insert the plug fully
into the jack.
(European and Asian models)
Push
Insert wire
Release
Insert the plug fully
into the jack.
Once your AV receiver is ready for use, you’ll
need to tune into an FM radio station and adjust
the position of the FM antenna to achieve the best
possible reception.
Once your AV receiver is ready for use, you’ll
need to tune into an AM radio station and adjust
the position of the AM antenna to achieve the best
possible reception.
Keep the antenna as far away as possible from
your AV receiver, TV, speaker cables, and power
cords.
Use thumbtacks or something similar to
fix the FM antenna into position.
2
If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied
indoor AM loop antenna, try using it with a commer-
cially available outdoor AM antenna (see page 28).
Thumbtacks, etc.
Caution:
Be careful that you don’t injure yourself when
using thumbtacks.
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting the AV receiver—Continued
Connecting an Outdoor FM Antenna
Connecting an Outdoor AM Antenna
If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied
indoor FM antenna, try a commercially available out-
door FM antenna instead.
If good reception cannot be achieved using the supplied
AM loop antenna, an outdoor AM antenna can be used
in addition to the loop antenna, as shown.
Outdoor antenna
Insulated antenna cable
AM loop antenna
Notes:
• Outdoor FM antennas work best outside, but usable
results can sometimes be obtained when installed in an
attic or loft.
Outdoor AM antennas work best when installed outside
horizontally, but good results can sometimes be obtained
indoors by mounting horizontally above a window. Note
that the outdoor antenna should be right connected.
Outdoor antenna must be grounded in accordance with
local regulations to prevent electrical shock hazards.
• For best results, install the outdoor FM antenna well
away from tall buildings, preferably with a clear line
of sight to your local FM transmitter.
• Outdoor antenna should be located away from possi-
ble noise sources, such as neon signs, busy roads, etc.
• For safety reasons, outdoor antenna should be situated
well away from power lines and other high-voltage
equipment.
• Outdoor antenna must be grounded in accordance
with local regulations to prevent electrical shock haz-
ards.
■ Using a TV/FM Antenna Splitter
It’s best not to use the same antenna for both FM and TV
reception, as this can cause interference problems. If cir-
cumstances demand it, use a TV/FM antenna splitter, as
shown.
TV/FM antenna splitter
To AV receiver
To TV (or VCR)
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting the AV receiver—Continued
AV Connection Color Coding
About AV Connections
RCA-type AV connections are usually color-coded: red,
white, and yellow. Use red plugs to connect right-chan-
nel audio inputs and outputs (typically labeled “R”). Use
white plugs to connect left-channel audio inputs and out-
puts (typically labeled “L”). And use yellow plugs to
connect composite video inputs and outputs.
• Before making any AV connections, read the manuals
supplied with your other AV components.
• Don’t connect the power cord until you’ve completed
and double-checked all AV connections.
Optical Digital Jacks
Analog audio
Left (white)
Right (red)
Left (white)
Right (red)
The AV receiver’s optical digital jacks have shutter-type
covers that open when an optical plug is inserted and
close when it’s removed. Push plugs in all the way.
Composite video
(Yellow)
(Yellow)
Right!
Caution:
• Push plugs in all the way to make
good connections (loose connec-
tions can cause noise or malfunc-
tions).
To prevent shutter damage, hold the optical plug straight
when inserting and removing.
• To prevent interference, keep
audio and video cables away from
power cords and speaker cables.
Wrong!
AV Cables & Jacks
Video / Audio
Cable
Jack
Description
HDMI connections can carry uncompressed stan-
dard- or high-definition digital video and audio and
offer the best picture and sound quality.
HDMI
HDMI
Video
Component video separates the luminance (Y) and
color difference signals (PR, PB), providing the best
picture quality (some TV manufacturers label their
component video sockets slightly differently).
Y
Y
PB/CB
PR/CR
Component
video cable
PB/CB
PR/CR
S-Video separates the luminance and color signals and
provides better picture quality than composite video.
S-Video cable
Composite video is commonly used on TVs, VCRs,
and other video equipment.
Composite
video cable
V
Audio
Offers the best sound quality and allows you to
enjoy surround sound (e.g., Dolby Digital, DTS).
The audio quality is the same as for coaxial.
OPTICAL
Optical digital
audio cable
Offers the best sound quality and allows you to
enjoy surround sound (e.g., Dolby Digital, DTS).
The audio quality is the same as for optical.
Coaxial digital
audio cable
This cable carries analog audio. It’s the most com-
mon connection format for analog audio, and can be
found on virtually all AV components.
L
Analog audio
cable (RCA)
R
This cable carries multichannel analog audio and is
typically used to connect DVD players with a 7.1-
channel analog audio output. Several standard ana-
log audio cables can be used instead of a multichan-
nel cable.
Multichannel
analog audio
cable (RCA)
The AV receiver does not support SCART plugs.
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting the AV receiver—Continued
Connecting Components with HDMI
About HDMI
Designed to meet the increased demands of digital TV, HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) is a new digital
interface standard for connecting TVs, projectors, DVD/BD players, set-top boxes, and other video components. Until
now, several separate video and audio cables have been required to connect AV components. With HDMI, a single cable
can carry control signals, digital video, and up to eight channels of digital audio (2-channel PCM, multichannel digital
audio, and multichannel PCM).
*1
The HDMI video stream (i.e., video signal) is compatible with DVI (Digital Visual Interface) , so TVs and displays
with a DVI input can be connected by using an HDMI-to-DVI adapter cable. (This may not work with some TVs and
displays, resulting in no picture.)
*2
The AV receiver uses HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) , so only HDCP-compatible components
can display the picture.
The AV receiver’s HDMI interface is based on the following standard:
x.v.Color, Deep Color, Lip Sync, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby
Digital Plus, DSD, and Multichannel PCM
Supported Audio Formats
• 2-channel linear PCM (32–192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit)
• Multichannel linear PCM (up to 7.1 ch, 32–192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit)
• Bitstream (DSD, Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS, DTS Express, DTS-HD High Resolution
Audio, DTS-HD Master Audio)
Your DVD/BD players must also support HDMI output of the above audio formats.
■ Onkyo
, which stands for Remote Interactive over HDMI, is the name of the system control function found on Onkyo
components. The AV receiver can be used with CEC (Consumer Electronics Control), which allows system control over
HDMI and is part of the HDMI standard. CEC provides interoperability between various components, however, opera-
tion with components other than
-compatible components cannot be guaranteed.
• Set “HDMI Control (RIHD)” to “On” (page 114).
• See “Controlling a TV” (page 143) and “Controlling a DVD Player or DVD Recorder” (page 144) for operation.
Notes:
• Do not connect the
-compatible component more than the following number to the HDMI input terminal so
that the linked operations work properly.
a. DVD/BD player is up to three.
b. DVD/BD recorder is up to three.
c. Cable/Satellite Set-top box is up to four.
• Do not connect the AV receiver to the other AV receiver /AV amplifier via HDMI.
• When the
not guaranteed.
• The
-compatible component more than the above-mentioned is connected, the linked operations are
control does not support HDMI OUT SUB. Use HDMI OUT MAIN instead.
About Copyright Protection
*2
The AV receiver supports HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) , a copy-protection system for digital
video signals. Other devices connected to the AV receiver via HDMI must also support HDCP.
*3
*1 DVI (Digital Visual Interface): The digital display interface standard set by the DDWG in 1999.
*2 HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection): The video encryption technology developed by Intel for HDMI/DVI. It’s designed to
protect video content and requires a HDCP-compatible device to display the encrypted video.
*3 DDWG (Digital Display Working Group): Lead by Intel, Compaq, Fujitsu, Hewlett Packard, IBM, NEC, and Silicon Image, this open
industry group’s objective is to address the industry’s requirements for a digital connectivity specification for high-performance PCs and
digital displays.
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting the AV receiver—Continued
Making HDMI Connections
Step 1:
Use HDMI cables to connect the AV receiver’s HDMI jacks to your HDMI-compatible DVD/BD player, TV, projec-
tor, and so on.
Step 2:
Assign each HDMI IN to an input selector in the HDMI Input Setup (see page 54).
■ Video Signals
Digital video signals received by the HDMI IN jacks are normally output by the HDMI MAIN OUT and SUB OUT for
display on your TV. Composite video, S-Video, and component video sources can be upconverted for the HDMI output.
See “Video Connection Formats” on page 32 for more information.
■ Audio Signals
Digital audio signals received by the HDMI IN jacks are output by the speakers and headphones connected to the AV
receiver. Normally, they are not output by the HDMI outputs, unless the “Audio TV Out” setting is set to “On” (see
page 113).
To listen to audio received by the HDMI IN jacks through your TV’s speakers:
Hint!
•Set the “TV Control” setting to “On” (see page 114) for an
-compatible TV.
•Set the “Audio TV Out” setting to “On” (see page 113) when the TV is not compatible with
or the “TV Control” setting to “Off”.
•Set your DVD/BD player’s HDMI audio output setting to PCM.
HDMI
IN
HDMI
OUT
TV
DVD/BD player
HD camcorder, etc
Notes:
• The HDMI video stream is compatible with DVI (Digital Visual Interface), so TVs and displays with a DVI input can
be connected by using an HDMI-to-DVI adapter cable. (Note that DVI connections only carry video, so you’ll need
to make a separate connection for audio.) However, reliable operation with such an adapter is not guaranteed. In
addition, video signals from a PC are not guaranteed.
• When listening to an HDMI component through the AV receiver, set the HDMI component so that its video can be
seen on the TV screen (on the TV, select the input of the HDMI component connected to the AV receiver). If the TV
power is off or the TV is set to another input source, this may result in no sound from the AV receiver or the sound
may be cut off.
• When the “Audio TV Out” setting is set to “On” (see page 113) to hear from your TV’s speakers, by controlling the
AV receiver’s volume, the sound will be output from the AV receiver’s speakers, too. When the “TV Control” setting
is set to “On” to hear from speakers of
-compatible TV, by controlling the AV receiver’s volume, the AV
receiver’s speakers will produce sound while the TV’s speakers are muted. To stop the AV receiver’s speakers pro-
ducing sound, change the settings, change your TV’s settings, or turn down the AV receiver’s volume.
• The HDMI audio signal (sampling rate, bit length, etc.) may be restricted by the connected source component. If the
picture is poor or there’s no sound from a component connected via HDMI, check its setup. Refer to the connected
component’s instruction manual for details.
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting the AV receiver—Continued
Connecting Both Audio & Video
By connecting both the audio and video outputs of your DVD/BD player and other AV components to the AV receiver,
you can select both the audio and video simultaneously simply by selecting the appropriate input source on the AV
receiver.
: Signal Flow
Video
Audio
Video
Audio
TV, projector,
etc.
DVD/BD player, etc.
Speakers
(see page 21 for connection information)
Which Connections Should I Use?
The AV receiver supports several connection formats for compatibility with a wide range of AV equipment. The format
you choose will depend on the formats supported by your other components. Use the following sections as a guide.
Video Connection Formats
Video equipment can be connected to the AV receiver by using any one of the following video connection formats:
composite video, S-Video, component video, or HDMI, the latter offering the best picture quality.
The AV receiver can upconvert and downconvert between video formats, depending on the “Monitor Out” setting, which
generally determines whether video signals are upconverted for the component video output or the HDMI output.
For optimal video performance, THX recommends that video signals pass through the system without upconver-
sion (e.g., component video input through to component video output).
To by-pass video upconversion in the receiver, simultaneously press the [VCR/DVR] and [RETURN] buttons
on the AV receiver. While continuing to hold down the [VCR/DVR] button, press the [RETURN] button to
toggle until "Skip" appears on the display. Release both buttons.
To use the video upconversion in the receiver, repeat the above process until "Use" appears on the display and
release the buttons.
■ “Monitor Out” Setting Set to “HDMI Main” or “HDMI Sub”
With the “Monitor Out” setting set to “HDMI
DVD/BD player, etc.
Video Signal Flow Chart
Main” or “HDMI Sub” (see page 52), video input
signals flow through the AV receiver as shown,
with composite video, S-Video, and component
video sources all being upconverted for the
HDMI output. Use the “HDMI Main” or
“HDMI Sub” setting if you connect the AV
receiver’s HDMI OUT MAIN or HDMI OUT
SUB, respectively, to your TV.
Composite
S-Video
Component
HDMI
IN
AV receiver
The composite video, S-Video, and component
video outputs pass through their respective input
signals as they are.
MONITOR OUT
S-Video
Component
HDMI
Composite
Note:
If not connected to the same output you have
selected in the “Monitor Out” setting, the “Mon-
itor Out” setting will be automatically switched
to “Analog” (see page 52). In this case, the set-
TV, projector, etc.
ting of the output resolution will be that for HDMI output (see page 52). However, it will be switched to “1080i” when
“1080p” is selected, and to “Through” when “Auto” is selected.
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ “Monitor Out” Setting Set to “Both”, “Both(Main)” or “Both(Sub)”
DVD/BD player, etc.
Video Signal Flow Chart
With the “Monitor Out” setting set to “Both”,
“Both(Main)” or “Both(Sub)” (see page 52),
video input signals flow through the AV receiver
as shown, with composite video, S-Video, and
component video sources all being upconverted
for both HDMI outputs. Use the “Both”,
“Both(Main)” or “Both(Sub)” setting if you
connect the AV receiver’s HDMI OUT MAIN
and HDMI OUT SUB to your TVs.
Composite
S-Video
Component
HDMI
IN
AV receiver
The composite video, S-Video, and component
video outputs pass through their respective input
signals as they are.
MONITOR OUT
S-Video
Component
HDMI
Composite
Both: Video signals are output from both HDMI
outputs at the resolution supported by both TVs.
You cannot select “Resolution” setting. The pic-
ture adjust setting will be that for “HDMI Main”.
Both (Main): Video signals are output from both
HDMI outputs but HDMI OUT MAIN will
TV, projector, etc.
become a priority; depending on the resolution, video signals may not be output from HDMI OUT SUB.
Both (Sub): Video signals are output from both HDMI outputs but HDMI OUT SUB will become a priority; depending
on the resolution, video signals may not be output from HDMI OUT MAIN.
Note:
The “Monitor Out” setting will be automatically switched to “Analog” (see page 52) if not connected to both outputs
when “Both” is selected or if not connected to a priority output when “Both(Main)” or “Both(Sub)” is selected.
■ “Monitor Out” Setting Set to “Analog”
With the “Monitor Out” setting set to “Analog”
DVD/BD player, etc.
Video Signal Flow Chart
(see page 52), video input signals flow through
the AV receiver as shown, with composite video
and S-Video sources being upconverted for the
component video output. Use this setting if you
connect the AV receiver’s COMPONENT
VIDEO MONITOR OUT to your TV.
Composite video is upconverted to S-Video and
S-Video is downconverted to composite video.
Note that these conversions only apply to the
MONITOR OUT V and S outputs, not the
VCR/DVR OUT V and S outputs.
Composite
S-Video
Component
HDMI
IN
AV receiver
MONITOR OUT
S-Video
Component
HDMI
Composite
The composite video, S-Video, and component
video outputs pass through their respective input
signals as they are.
This signal flow also applies when the “Resolu-
tion” setting is set to “Through” (see page 52).
TV, projector, etc.
Video Signal Flow and the Resolution Setting
When the “Monitor Out” setting is set to “Ana-
log” (see page 52), if the “Resolution” setting is
set to anything other than “Through” (see
page 52), the video signal flow will be as shown
here, with composite video and S-Video sources
being upconverted for the component video out-
put.
DVD/BD player, etc.
Video Signal Flow Chart
Composite
S-Video
Component
HDMI
IN
AV receiver
The composite video, S-Video, and component
video outputs pass through their respective ana-
log input signals as they are. HDMI input signals
are not output.
MONITOR OUT
S-Video
Component
HDMI
Composite
TV, projector, etc.
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting the AV receiver—Continued
Audio Connection Formats
DVD/BD player, etc.
Audio equipment can be connected to the AV
receiver by using any of the following audio con-
nection formats: analog, optical, coaxial, analog
multichannel, or HDMI.
Audio Signal Flow Chart
Analog Multichannel Optical Coaxial
HDMI
HDMI
When choosing a connection format, bear in
mind that the AV receiver does not convert digital
input signals for analog line outputs and vice
versa. For example, audio signals connected to
an optical or coaxial digital input are not output
by the analog TV/TAPE OUT.
AV receiver
Analog
1
*
*1 Depends on the “Audio TV Out” setting (see
page 113).
*2 Only the front L/R channels are output.
TV, projector, etc.
If signals are present at more than one input, the inputs will be selected automatically in the following order of priority:
HDMI, digital, analog.
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting a TV or Projector
See “Connecting Components with HDMI” on page 30 for HDMI connection information.
Step 1: Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches your TV (
,
, or ), and then make the connection.
A
B
C
Step 2: Audio Connection
Choose an audio connection that matches your TV (
,
, or ), and then make the connection.
a
b
c
• With connection , you can listen to and record audio from your TV or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
a
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection or . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use
b
c
and , or and .)
a
b
a
c
Connection
AV receiver
Signal flow
TV, projector, etc.
Component video input
S-Video input
COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT
MONITOR OUT S
⇒
⇒
⇒
⇐
⇐
A
B
C
a
MONITOR OUT V
Composite video input
Analog audio L/R output
Digital coaxial output
TV/TAPE IN L/R
DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 2 (VCR/DVR)
b
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1 (GAME) (TX-NR3007)
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 2 (TV/TAPE) (TX-NR5007)
⇐
Digital optical output
c
A
c
C
B
a
When you use connection
,
b
you need to assign the digital
audio input (see page 56).
(TX-NR3007) When you use connection
you need to assign the digital audio input
,
c
(see page 56).
TV, projector,
etc.
L
R
COAXIAL
OUT
OPTICAL
OUT
AUDIO
OUT
S VIDEO
IN
VIDEO
IN
Y
PB
PR
COMPONENT VIDEO IN
If your TV has no audio outputs, connect an audio output from your VCR or cable or satellite receiver
to the AV receiver and use its tuner to listen to TV programs through the AV receiver (see pages 38 and
40).
Hint!
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting a DVD Player
See “Connecting Components with HDMI” on page 30 for HDMI connection information.
Step 1: Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches your DVD player (
,
, or ), and then make the connection.
A
B
C
You must connect the AV receiver to your TV via the same type of connection.
Step 2: Audio Connection
Choose an audio connection that matches your DVD player (
,
, or ), and then make the connection.
a
b
c
• With connection , you can listen to and record audio from your DVD player or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
a
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection or . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use
b
c
and , or and .)
a
b
a
c
• If your DVD player has main left and right outputs and multichannel left and right outputs, be sure to use the
main left and right outputs for connection
.
a
Connection
AV receiver
Signal flow
DVD player
COMPONENT VIDEO IN 1 (DVD/BD)
DVD/BD IN S
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
Component video output
S-Video output
A
B
C
a
DVD/BD IN V
Composite video output
Analog audio L/R output
Digital coaxial output
Digital optical output
DVD/BD IN L/R
DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 1 (DVD/BD)
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1 (GAME)
b
c
A
b
c
C
B
a
When you use connection , you
c
need to assign the digital audio input
(see page 56).
L
R
COAXIAL
OUT
OPTICAL
OUT
AUDIO
OUT
S VIDEO
OUT
VIDEO
OUT
Y
PB
PR
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
DVD player
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting the AV receiver—Continued
Hooking Up the Multichannel Input
If your DVD player supports multichannel audio formats such as DVD-Audio and Super Audio CD, and it has a multi-
channel analog audio output, you can connect it to the AV receiver’s multichannel input.
Use a multichannel analog audio cable, or several normal audio cables, to connect the AV receiver’s MULTI CH:
output on your DVD player. If your DVD player has a 5.1-channel analog audio output, don’t connect anything to the
AV receiver’s SURR BACK L/R jacks.
Before using the multichannel input, you must assign it to an input selector. See “Analog Audio Input Setup” on page 57.
To select the multichannel input, see “Audio Selector” on page 119. To adjust the subwoofer sensitivity for the multi-
channel input, see “Subwoofer Input Sensitivity” on page 94.
7.1 ch
5.1 ch
L
R
L
R
L
R
CENTER
FRONT
SUB
WOOFER
SURROUND
SURR
BACK
DVD player
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting the AV receiver—Continued
Connecting a VCR or DVD Recorder for Playback
With this hookup, you can use your VCR’s tuner to listen to your favorite TV programs via the AV
receiver, useful if your TV has no audio outputs.
Hint!
Step 1: Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches your VCR or DVD recorder (
,
, or ), and then make the connection.
A
B
C
You must connect the AV receiver to your TV via the same type of connection.
Step 2: Audio Connection
Choose an audio connection that matches your VCR or DVD recorder (
,
, or ), and then make the connection.
a
b
c
• With connection , you can listen to the VCR or DVD recorder in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
a
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection or . (To listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use and
b
c
a
, or and .)
b
a
c
Connection
AV receiver
Signal flow
VCR or DVD recorder
Component video output
S-Video output
COMPONENT VIDEO IN 2 (CBL/SAT)
VCR/DVR IN S
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
A
B
C
a
VCR/DVR IN V
Composite video output
Analog audio L/R output
Digital coaxial output
Digital optical output
VCR/DVR IN L/R
DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 2 (VCR/DVR)
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1 (GAME)
b
c
.
A
b
c
C
B
a
When you use connection
,
c
you need to assign the digital
audio input (see page 56).
When you use connection , you need
A
to assign the component video input
(see page 55).
L
R
COAXIAL
OUT
OPTICAL
OUT
AUDIO
OUT
S VIDEO
OUT
VIDEO
OUT
Y
PB
PR
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
VCR or DVD
recorder
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting the AV receiver—Continued
Connecting a VCR or DVD Recorder for Recording
Step 1: Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches your VCR or DVD recorder ( or ), and then make the connection. The
A
B
video source to be recorded must be connected to the AV receiver via the same type of connection.
Step 2: Audio Connection
Make the audio connection
.
a
Connection
AV receiver
Signal flow
VCR or DVD recorder
S-Video input
⇒
VCR/DVR OUT S
VCR/DVR OUT V
VCR/DVR OUT L/R
A
B
a
⇒
⇒
Composite video input
Analog audio L/R input
B
A
a
L
R
VCR or DVD
recorder
AUDIO
IN
S VIDEO
IN
VIDEO
IN
Notes:
• The AV receiver must be turned on for recording. Recording is not possible while it’s in Standby mode.
• If you want to record directly from your TV or playback VCR to the recording VCR without going through the AV
receiver, connect the TV/VCR’s audio and video outputs directly to the recording VCR’s audio and video inputs. See
the manuals supplied with your TV and VCR for details.
• Video signals connected to composite video inputs can only be recorded via composite video outputs. If your
TV/VCR is connected to a composite video input, the recording VCR must be connected to a composite video output.
Similarly, video signals connected to S-Video inputs can only be recorded via S-Video outputs. If your TV/VCR is
connected to an S-Video input, the recording VCR must be connected to an S-Video output.
• Sources connected to a digital input cannot be recorded. Only analog inputs can be recorded.
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting the AV receiver—Continued
Connecting a Satellite, Cable, Terrestrial Set-top box, or Other Video Source
With this hookup, you can use your satellite or cable receiver to listen to your favorite TV programs
via the AV receiver, useful if your TV has no audio outputs.
Hint!
Step 1: Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches the video source (
,
, or ), and then make the connection.
A
B
C
You must connect the AV receiver to your TV via the same type of connection.
Step 2: Audio Connection
Choose an audio connection that matches the video source (
,
, or ), and then make the connection.
a
b
c
• With connection , you can listen to and record audio from the video source or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
a
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection or . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use
b
c
and , or and .)
a
b
a
c
Connection
AV receiver
Signal flow
Video source
Component video output
S-Video output
COMPONENT VIDEO IN 2 (CBL/SAT)
CBL/SAT IN S
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
A
B
C
a
CBL/SAT IN V
Composite video output
Analog audio L/R output
Digital coaxial output
Digital optical output
CBL/SAT IN L/R
DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 3 (CBL/SAT)
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1 (GAME)
b
c
A
b
c
C
B
a
When you use connection , you
c
need to assign the digital audio
input (see page 56).
L
R
COAXIAL
OUT
OPTICAL
OUT
AUDIO
OUT
S VIDEO
OUT
VIDEO
OUT
Y
PB
PR
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
Satellite, cable,
set-top box, etc.
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting the AV receiver—Continued
Connecting a Game Console
Step 1: Video Connection
Choose a video connection that matches your game console (
,
, or ), and then make the connection.
A
B
C
You must connect the AV receiver to your TV with the same type of connection.
Step 2: Audio Connection
Choose an audio connection that matches your game console ( or ), and then make the connection.
a
b
• With connection , you can listen to and record audio from your game console or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
a
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use
b
a
and .)
b
Connection
AV receiver
COMPONENT VIDEO IN 3 (GAME)
GAME IN S
Signal flow
Game console
Component video output
S-Video output
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
⇐
A
B
C
a
GAME IN V
Composite video output
Analog audio L/R output
Digital optical output
GAME IN L/R
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1 (GAME)
b
A
b
C
B
a
L
R
OPTICAL
OUT
AUDIO
OUT
S VIDEO
OUT
VIDEO
OUT
Y
PB
PR
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
Game Console
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting the AV receiver—Continued
Connecting a Camcorder or Other Device
Step 1: Video Connection
Make the connection
.
A
Step 2: Audio Connection
Choose an audio connection that matches your camcorder ( or ), and then make the connection.
a
b
Connection
AV receiver
Signal flow
Camcorder etc.
Composite video output
Analog audio L/R output
Digital optical output
AUX1 INPUT VIDEO
AUX1 INPUT L-AUDIO-R
AUX1 INPUT DIGITAL
⇐
⇐
⇐
A
a
b
AUX1 INPUT
VIDEO
AUX1 INPUT
AUX1 INPUT
DIGITAL
L
AUDIO
R
a
A
b
VIDEO
OUT
L
AUDIO
OUT
R
OPTICAL
OUT
Camcorder etc.
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting the AV receiver—Continued
Connecting a CD Player or Turntable
■ CD Player or Turntable (MM) with Built-in Phono Preamp
Step 1:
Choose a connection that matches your CD player (
,
, or ). Use connection for a turntable with a built-in
a
b
c
a
phono preamp.
• With connection , you can listen to and record audio from your CD player or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
a
• To connect the CD player digitally, use connection or . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well,
b
c
use and , or and .)
a
b
a
c
Connection
AV receiver
Signal flow
CD or turntable
Analog audio L/R output
Digital coaxial output
CD IN L/R
⇐
⇐
a
b
DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 2 (VCR/DVR)
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 2 (CD) (TX-NR3007)
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 3 (CD) (TX-NR5007)
⇐
Digital optical output
c
COAXIAL
b
IN 2
(VCR/DVR)
IN
L
L
OPTICAL
c
R
R
When you use
IN 3
(CD)
AUDIO
OUTPUT
CD
IN
a
connection , you
b
L
need to assign the
digital audio input
(see page 56).
a
R
CD
R
L
COAXIAL
OUT
OPTICAL
OUT
AUDIO
OUT
CD player
Turntable (MM) with
built-in phono preamp
■ Turntable (MM) with no Phono Preamp Built-in
The AV receiver’s PHONO IN is designed for use with a mov-
ing magnet (MM) type cartridge.
Use an analog audio cable to connect the AV receiver’s PHONO
IN L/R jacks to the audio output on your turntable.
Notes:
• If your turntable has a ground wire, connect it to the AV
receiver’s GND screw. With some turntables, connecting the
ground wire may produce an audible hum.
If this happens, disconnect it.
• If your turntable has a moving coil (MC) type cartridge,
you’ll need a commercially available MC head amp or MC
transformer. Connect your turntable to the head amp or trans-
former, and connect that to the AV receiver’s PHONO IN L/R
jacks.
AUDIO
OUTPUT
L
• You can also use a phono equalizer to connect a turntable
with an MC-type cartridge. See your phono equalizer’s man-
ual for details.
R
Turntable (MM) with no
phono preamp built-in
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting the AV receiver—Continued
Connecting a Cassette, CDR, MiniDisc, or DAT Recorder
Step 1:
Choose a connection that matches the recorder (
,
or ), and then make the connection.
a
b
c
• With connection , you can play and record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.
a
• To connect the recorder digitally for playback, use connections and , or and
.
a
b
a
c
Connection
AV receiver
Signal flow Cassette, CDR, MD, or DAT recorder
TV/TAPE IN L/R
TV/TAPE OUT L/R
⇐
⇒
Analog audio L/R output
Analog audio L/R input
a
b
c
DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 3 (CBL/SAT)
⇐
Digital coaxial output
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1 (GAME) (TX-NR3007)
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 2 (TV/TAPE) (TX-NR5007)
⇐
Digital optical output
COAXIAL
IN
a
b
L
IN 3
(CBL/SAT)
R
TV/TAPE
c
OPTICAL
a
IN 2
(TV/TAPE)
L
R
TV/TAPE
(TX-NR3007) When you use connection , you need
c
to assign the digital audio input (see page 56).
When you use connection
,
b
you need to assign the digital
L
R
L
R
audio input (see page 56).
COAXIAL
OUT
OPTICAL
OUT
AUDIO
IN
AUDIO
OUT
Cassette, CDR, MD, or
DAT recorder
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting the AV receiver—Continued
Connecting a Power Amplifier
If you want to use a more powerful power amplifier and use the AV receiver as a preamp, connect it to the PRE OUT
jacks, and connect all speakers and the subwoofer to the power amplifier. You can connect the powered subwoofer with
each jacks respectively. If you use one subwoofer, connect it to PRE OUT: SW1.
Power amplifier
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1. Front left speaker
2. Center speaker
3. Front right speaker
4. Surround left speaker
5. Surround right speaker
6. Surround left back speaker
7. Surround right back speaker
Powered subwoofer
8. Front wide/Front high left speaker*
9 Front wide/Front high right speaker*
See “Connecting Powered Sub-
woofers” on page 19 for more
Note:
*
Specify “None” for the channel that you don’t want to output in the “Speaker Configuration” (page 95).
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting the AV receiver—Continued
Connecting an RI Dock
■ If you have an Onkyo DS-A1 RI Dock
Connect its video output jack to the AV receiver’s
GAME IN S or VCR/DVR IN S jack.
Not all iPod models output video. For information
about which iPod models are supported by the RI
Dock, see the RI Dock’s instruction manual.
■ If Your iPod Doesn’t Support Video:
Connect your RI Dock’s audio output jacks to the
AV receiver’s TV/TAPE IN L/R jacks. (Onkyo DS-
A2 hookup shown below.)
■ If Your iPod Supports Video:
Connect your RI Dock’s audio output jacks to the
AV receiver’s GAME IN or VCR/DVR IN L/R jacks,
and connect its video output jack to the AV receiver’s
GAME IN V or VCR/DVR IN V jack. (Onkyo DS-
A2 hookup shown below.)
IN
L
R
TV/TAPE
GAME
VCR/DVR
V
V
IN
IN
IN
IN
L
L
R
R
GAME
VCR/DVR
Make either
connection.
Notes:
• Enter the appropriate remote control code before using the AV receiver’s remote controller for the first time (see
page 141).
• Connect the RI Dock to the AV receiver with an u cable (see page 47).
• Set the RI Dock’s RI MODE switch to “HDD” or “HDD/DOCK”.
• Set the AV receiver’s Input Display to “DOCK” (see page 60).
• See the RI Dock’s instruction manual for more information.
Connecting a Universal Port Option Series
ex. UP-A1
Note:
When UP-A1 Dock that seated iPod is connected, the power consumption on standby mode slightly increases.
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting the AV receiver—Continued
IN
L
R
Step 1:
CD
Make sure that each Onkyo component is connected
to the AV receiver with an analog audio cable (con-
REMOTE
CONTROL
IN
L
nection in the hookup examples) (see pages 35 to
a
R
44, 46).
DVD/BD
Step 2:
Make the u connection (see illustration right).
e.g., CD player
e.g., DVD player
Step 3:
R
L
If you’re using an MD, CDR, or RI Dock, change the
ANALOG
AUDIO OUT
Input Display (see page 60).
With u (Remote Interactive), you can use the follow-
R
L
ing special functions:
ANALOG
AUDIO OUT
■ Auto Power On/Standby
When you start playback on a component connected
via u, if the AV receiver is on Standby, it will auto-
matically turn on and select that component as the
input source. Similarly, when the AV receiver is set
to Standby, all components connected via u will
also go on Standby.
Connecting the Power Cord
Notes:
• Before connecting the power cord, connect all of
your speakers and AV components.
• Turning on the AV receiver may cause a momentary
power surge that might interfere with other electrical
equipment on the same circuit. If this is a problem,
plug the AV receiver into a different branch circuit.
• Do not use a power cord other than the one supplied
with the AV receiver. The supplied power cord is
designed exclusively for use with the AV receiver and
should not be used with any other equipment.
• Never disconnect the power cord from the AV receiver
while the other end is still plugged into a wall outlet.
Doing so may cause an electric shock. Always discon-
nect the power cord from the wall outlet first, and then
the AV receiver.
■ Direct Change
When playback is started on a component connected
via u, the AV receiver automatically selects that
component as the input source.
■ Remote Control
control your other u-capable Onkyo components,
pointing the remote controller at the AV receiver’s
remote control sensor instead of the component. You
must enter the appropriate remote control code first
(see page 142).
Step 1:
Connect the supplied power cord to the AV receiver’s
Notes:
AC INLET.
• Use only u cables for u connections. u cables
are supplied with Onkyo players (DVD, CD, etc.).
• Some components have two u jacks. You can con-
nect either one to the AV receiver. The other jack is for
connecting additional u-capable components.
• Connect only Onkyo components to u jacks. Con-
necting other manufacturer’s components may cause a
malfunction.
To AC wall outlet
• Some components may not support all u functions.
Refer to the manuals supplied with your other Onkyo
components.
• While Zone 2 or Zone 3 is on, the Auto Power
On/Standby and Direct Change u functions do not
work.
Step 2:
Plug the power cord into an AC wall outlet.
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turning On the AV receiver
(European and Asian models)
(North American models)
STANDBY
ON
ON/STANDBY
ON/STANDBY
STANDBY indicator
STANDBY indicator
RECEIVER
POWER
Turning On and Standby
(European and Asian models)
Set the [POWER] switch to the ON position ( ).
1
On the AV receiver, press the [ON/STANDBY] button.
2
AV receiver
Remote
controller
On the remote controller, press the [RECEIVER] button, followed by the
[ON] button.
or
The AV receiver comes on, the display lights up, and the STANDBY indicator goes off.
Pressing the remote controller’s [ON] button again will turn on any components
connected via u.
To turn the AV receiver off, press the [ON/STANDBY] button, or press the remote
controller’s [STANDBY] button. The AV receiver will enter Standby mode. To prevent
any loud surprises when you turn on the AV receiver, always turn down the volume
before you turn it off.
European and Asian models: To completely shut down the AV receiver, set the [POWER] switch to the OFF position
(
).
Smooth Operation in a Few Easy Steps
To ensure smooth operation, here’s a few easy steps to help you configure the AV receiver before you use it for the
very first time. These settings only need to be made once.
■ Did you connect your TV to an HDMI output or COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT?
If you did, “Monitor Setup” on page 49.
■ Run MultEQ XT Room Correction and Speaker Setup—this is essential!
®
■ Have you connected a component to an HDMI input,
component video input, or digital audio input?
If you have, see “HDMI Input Setup” on page 54, “Component Video
Input Setup” on page 55, or “Digital Audio Input Setup” on page 56
respectively.
HDMI
OUT
IN
■ Have you connected an Onkyo MD recorder, CD recorder,
or RI Dock?
If you have, see “Changing the Input Display” on page 60.
TV/TAPE
MD recorder, CD recorder,
RI Dock
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Time Setup
This section explains the settings that you need to make before using the AV receiver for the very first time.
■ Change “Monitor Out” setting manually
Monitor Setup
If you connect your TV to HDMI OUT MAIN, “Monitor
Out” setting is automatically set so that the onscreen
setup menus are displayed and composite video, S-
Video, and component video sources are upconverted*
and output.
Composite video, S-Video,
component video
HDMI
MONITOR OUT
Press the [MONITOR OUT] but-
IN
1
ton.
The current setting is displayed.
OUT
Composite video, S-Video,
HDMI
component video
On the “Monitor Out” settings, you can select whether or
not to have the video sources’ images output through the
HDMI output, as well as whether to have the onscreen
setup menu output through the HDMI output or through
an analog output.
If you connect your TV to the COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR OUT (not the HDMI output), “Monitor Out”
setting is automatically set so that the onscreen setup
menus are displayed and composite video and S-Video
sources are upconverted* and output.
Press the [MONITOR OUT] button
repeatedly to select: Analog,
HDMI Main, HDMI Sub, Both,
Both(Main) or Both(Sub)
For details on each item, see step 4 in
the page 52.
2
Tips:
[VIDEO] button on the remote controller.
• This setting can also be performed by using Onscreen
Setup Menu (see page 52).
Composite video, S-Video
IN
Component video
Notes:
• See page 32 for charts showing how the “Monitor
Out” and “Resolution” (see page 52) settings affect
• You can specify the output resolution for the HDMI
outputs and COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT
and have the AV receiver upconvert the picture
resolution as necessary to match the resolution
supported by your TV (see page 52).
OUT
Composite video, S-Video
Component video
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Time Setup—Continued
In this Instruction Manual, illustrations from the onscreen menu or explanations referring to the menu will be in the
same language as the Instruction Manual. The default Language setting for the onscreen menu is English. If your
Instruction Manual is in a language other than English, first follow the instructions below to change the Language.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
3
Selecting the Language used for the
onscreen setup menus
tons to select “2. OSD Setup”,
and then press [ENTER].
The “OSD Setup” menu appears.
This setting determines the language used for the
onscreen setup menus. You can select: English, German,
French, Spanish, Italian, Dutch, Swedish, or Chinese.
6–2. OSD Setup
Immediate Display
Display Position
TV Format
On
Bottom
Auto
Language
English
(European and Asian models)
RECEIVER
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “Language”, and
then use the Left and Right [e]/
[r] buttons to select:
4
qwer
ENTER
SETUP
English, Deutsch, Français, Español,
Italiano, Nederlands, Svenska, 中文
Press the [RECEIVER] button,
1
followed by the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make
sure the appropriate external input is
selected on your TV.
Press the [SETUP] button.
The setup menu closes.
5
Menu
1. Input/Output Assign
2. Speaker Setup
3. Audio Adjust
4. Source Setup
5. Listening Mode Preset
6. Miscellaneous
7. Hardware Setup
8. Remote Controller Setup
9. Lock Setup
Note:
This procedure can also be performed on the AV receiver
by using its [SETUP] button, arrow buttons, and
[ENTER] button.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
2
tons to select “6. Miscella-
neous”, and then press [ENTER].
The “Miscellaneous” menu appears.
6. Miscellaneous
1. Volume Setup
2. OSD Setup
50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Time Setup—Continued
Using the Display to change the
settings
The settings of the AV receiver can be changed using the
Display.
Press the [RECEIVER] button fol-
1
lowed by the [SETUP] button.
The main menu item appears on the
display.
RECEIVER
qwer
ENTER
SETUP
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
2
tons to select item and then
press [ENTER].
Using the Onscreen Setup Menus
Carry out the settings for the AV receiver by using the
Onscreen Setup Menu.
The submenu item appears on the
display.
Press the [SETUP] button to close the
menu.
Press the [RETURN] button to return to
the previous menu.
Press the [RECEIVER] button fol-
1
lowed by the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make
sure the appropriate external input is
selected on your TV.
Menu
Onscreen Setup Menus and Display
1. Input/Output Assign
2. Speaker Setup
3. Audio Adjust
4. Source Setup
5. Listening Mode Preset
6. Miscellaneous
As each item in the Onscreen Setup Menus is selected,
the selected items will be displayed one by one.
7. Hardware Setup
8. Remote Controller Setup
9. Lock Setup
Onscreen Setup Menus
Menu
1. Input/Output Assign
2. Speaker Setup
Tip:
3. Audio Adjust
On several functions, the explanation
will be displayed under the screen.
4. Source Setup
5. Listening Mode Preset
6. Miscellaneous
7. Hardware Setup
8. Remote Controller Setup
9. Lock Setup
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
2
tons to select item and then
press [ENTER].
Display
The submenu appears.
Press the [SETUP] button to close the
menu.
Press the [RETURN] button to return to
the previous menu.
Note:
®
During Audyssey MultEQ XT Room Correction and
Speaker Setup, messages, etc., that are displayed on the
TV screen will appear in the Display.
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Time Setup—Continued
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “Monitor Out”, and
use the Left and Right [e]/[r]
buttons to select:
Monitor Out Setup
4
If you connect your TV to the HDMI output, set the
“Monitor Out” setting so that the onscreen setup menus
are displayed and composite video, S-Video, and
component video sources are upconverted and output.
If you connect your TV to the COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR OUT, set the “Monitor Out” setting so that
the onscreen setup menus are displayed and composite
video and S-Video sources are upconverted and output.
You can specify the output resolution for the HDMI
outputs and COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT
and have the AV receiver upconvert the picture
resolution as necessary to match the resolution
supported by your TV.
Analog:
Select this if your TV is connected
to the COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR OUT, S MONITOR
OUT, or V MONITOR OUT.
HDMI Main:
Select this if your TV is connected
to the HDMI OUT MAIN.
HDMI Sub:
Select this if your TV is connected
to the HDMI OUT SUB.
Both:
Press the [RECEIVER] button,
Select this if your TVs are con-
nected to the HDMI OUT MAIN
and HDMI OUT SUB. Video sig-
nals are output from both HDMI
outputs at the resolution supported
by both TVs.
1
followed by the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make
sure the appropriate external input is
selected on your TV.
Both (Main):
Select this if your TVs are con-
nected to the HDMI OUT MAIN
and HDMI OUT SUB. Video sig-
nals are output from both HDMI
outputs but HDMI OUT MAIN will
become a priority; depending on the
resolution, video signals may not be
output from HDMI OUT SUB.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
2
tons to select “1. Input/Output
Assign”, and then press
[ENTER].
The “Input/Output Assign” menu
appears.
Both (Sub):
Select this if your TVs are con-
nected to the HDMI OUT MAIN
and HDMI OUT SUB. Video sig-
nals are output from both HDMI
outputs but HDMI OUT SUB will
become a priority; depending on the
resolution, video signals may not be
output from HDMI OUT MAIN.
1. Input/Output Assign
1. Monitor Out
2. HDMI Input
3. Component Video Input
4. Digital Audio Input
5. Analog Audio Input
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
3
tons to select “1. Monitor Out”,
and then press [ENTER].
Notes:
• If not connected to the same output
you have selected in the“Monitor
Out” setting, the “Monitor Out”
setting will be automatically
switched to “Analog”.
The “Monitor Out” menu appears.
1–1. Monitor Out
Monitor Out
Resolution
Brightness
Contrast
Hue
HDMI Main
Through
0
0
0
0
• When you select other than
“Analog”, the onscreen setup menus
are output by only the HDMI
outputs. If you’re not using the
HDMI output and select settings
by mistake and the menus
disappear, press the [MONITOR
OUT] button to select “Analog”.
• For Deep Color output, if the
“Monitor Out” setting is set to “Both
(Main)” or “Both (Sub)”, the number
of bit may be limited due to the
capability of your TV connected to a
priority output.
Saturation
52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Time Setup—Continued
Press the [SETUP] button.
The setup menu closes.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
6
5
tons to select “Resolution”, and
use the Left and Right [e]/[r]
buttons to select:
Through:
Select this to pass video through the
AV receiver at the same resolution
and with no conversion.
Notes:
• See page 32 for charts showing how the “Monitor
Out” and “Resolution” settings affect the video signal
flow through the AV receiver.
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [SETUP] button, arrow buttons,
and [ENTER] button.
Auto
:
*
Select this to have the AV receiver
automatically convert video at reso-
lutions not supported by your TV.
480p (480p/576p):
Select this for 480p or 576p output
and video conversion as necessary.
720p:
Select this for 720p output and
video conversion as necessary.
1080i:
Select this for 1080i output and
video conversion as necessary.
1080p
:
*
Select this for 1080p output and
video conversion as necessary.
1080p/24
:
*
Select this for 1080p output at 24
frames per second and video con-
Source:
Output will be according to the res-
olution level which was set in the
“Picture Adjust” setting (see
page 105).
Tips:
• The “Resolution” setting can also be
set using the [VIDEO] button on the
remote controller.
• The “Resolution” setting is set
respectively of main, sub, and
analog.
Notes:
• Settings marked with an asterisk (
)
*
are not available when the “Monitor
Out” setting is set to “Analog”.
• If the “Monitor Out” setting is set to
“Both”, this setting is fixed at
“Auto”.
• Depending on the incoming video
signal, video playback may not be
smooth or the vertical resolution may
be lowered. In this case select other
than “1080p/24”.
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Time Setup—Continued
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select an input selector,
and use the Left and Right [e]/
[r] buttons to select:
Video Input Setup
4
HDMI Input Setup
If you connect a video component to HDMI IN, you
must assign that input to an input selector. For example,
if you connect your DVD/BD player to HDMI IN 1, you
must assign HDMI IN 1 to the DVD/BD input selector.
If you’ve connected your TV to the AV receiver with an
HDMI cable, you can set the AV receiver so that
composite video, S-Video, and component video sources
are upconverted* and output by the HDMI output. You
can set this for each input selector by selecting the
“- - - - -” option.
HDMI1, HDMI2, HDMI3, HDMI4,
HDMI5, HDMI6,
HDMI7 (TX-NR5007):
Select the HDMI IN to which
the video component has
been connected.
- - - - -: Output composite video,
S-Video, and component
video sources from the HDMI
outputs. The video output sig-
nal from the HDMI outputs is
the one configured in “Com-
ponent Video Input Setup”
(see page 55).
Composite video, S-Video,
component video
HDMI
IN
• Each HDMI IN cannot be assigned to
more than one input selector. When
HDMI IN have already been
assigned, you must set first any
unused input selectors to “- - - - -” or
you will be unable to assign HDMI
IN to input selector.
OUT
Composite video, S-Video,
component video
HDMI
Press the [RECEIVER] button fol-
lowed by the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make
sure the appropriate external input is
selected on your TV.
1
2
• “AUX 1” is used only for digital
input from the front panel terminals.
Press the [SETUP] button.
The setup menu closes.
5
Notes:
• For composite video, S-Video, and component video
upconversion for the HDMI output, the “Monitor Out”
setting must be set to other than “Analog” (see
page 52), and the “HDMI Input” setting must be set to
“- - - - -”. See page 32 for more information on video
signal flow and upconversion.
(even if the HDMI input is assigned), the AV receiver
selects the video source based on the setting of
Component Video Input.
• When an HDMI IN is assigned to an input selector, the
AV receiver will select audio from HDMI IN as a pri-
ority. See “Digital Audio Input Setup” on page 56.
• The TUNER input selector cannot be assigned and is
fixed at the “- - - - -” option.
• If you connect an input component (such as UP-A1
Dock that seated iPod) to the UNIVERSAL PORT
jack, you cannot assign any input to PORT selector.
• Do not assign the component connected with the
HDMI input to the TV/TAPE selector when you set
“TV Control” setting to “On” (see page 114).
Otherwise, appropriate CEC (Consumer Electronics
Control) operation is not guaranteed.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “1. Input/Output
Assign”, and then press
[ENTER].
The “Input/Output Assign” menu
appears.
1. Input/Output Assign
1. Monitor Out
2. HDMI Input
3. Component Video Input
4. Digital Audio Input
5. Analog Audio Input
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “2. HDMI Input”,
and then press [ENTER].
3
The “HDMI Input” menu appears.
1–2. HDMI Input
DVD/BD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME
HDMI1
HDMI2
HDMI3
HDMI4
FRONT
AUX 1
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [SETUP] button, arrow buttons,
and [ENTER] button.
54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Time Setup—Continued
Component Video Input Setup
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “3. Component
Video Input”, and then press
[ENTER].
The “Component Video Input” menu
appears.
3
4
If you connect to a COMPONENT VIDEO IN, you must
assign it to an input selector. For example, if you connect
your DVD/BD player to COMPONENT VIDEO IN 2,
you should assign it to the DVD/BD input selector.
Input selector
DVD/BD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME
Default assignment
IN1
1–3. Component Video Input
DVD/BD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME
IN1
- - - - -
IN2
- - - - -
IN3
IN2
AUX 1
- - - - -
IN3
AUX 1
- - - - -
AUX 2
- - - - -
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select an input selector,
and then use the Left and Right
[e]/[r] buttons to select:
TV/TAPE
TUNER
CD
- - - - -
- - - - - (Fixed)
- - - - -
IN1: Select if the video component
is connected to COMPO-
NENT VIDEO IN 1.
PHONO
PORT
- - - - -
- - - - -
If you’ve connected your TV to the AV receiver with a
component video cable, you can set the AV receiver so
that composite video and S-Video sources are
IN2: Select if the video component
is connected to COMPO-
NENT VIDEO IN 2.
IN3: Select if the video component
is connected to COMPO-
NENT VIDEO IN 3.
upconverted* and output by the COMPONENT VIDEO
*1
MONITOR OUT . You can set this for each input
selector by selecting the “- - - - -” option.
- - - - -: Select if you are using the
HDMI outputs, rather than
the COMPONENT VIDEO
OUT, for the output from
composite video, S-Video,
and component video
Composite video, S-Video
IN
Component video
sources.
OUT
Composite video, S-Video
Component video
Press the [SETUP] button.
The setup menu closes.
5
*1 Only when “Monitor Out” setting is set to “Analog”.
Press the [RECEIVER] button fol-
1
lowed by the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make
sure the appropriate external input is
selected on your TV.
Notes:
• For composite video and S-Video upconversion for
the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT, the
“Monitor Out” setting must be set to “Analog” (see
page 52), and the “Component Video Input” setting
must be set to “- - - - -”. See page 32 for more
information on video signal flow and upconversion.
• If not connected to the same output you have selected
in the “Monitor Out” setting, the “Monitor Out”
setting will be automatically switched to “Analog”
(see page 52).
• If you connect an input component (such as UP-A1
Dock that seated iPod) to the UNIVERSAL PORT jack,
you cannot assign any input to PORT selector.
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [SETUP] button, arrow buttons,
and [ENTER] button.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
2
tons to select “1. Input/Output
Assign”, and then press
[ENTER].
The “Input/Output Assign” menu
appears.
1. Input/Output Assign
1. Monitor Out
2. HDMI Input
3. Component Video Input
4. Digital Audio Input
5. Analog Audio Input
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Time Setup—Continued
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select an input selector,
and use the Left and Right [e]/
[r] buttons to select “COAX1”,
“COAX2”, “COAX3”, “OPT1”,
“OPT2”, “OPT3” (TX-NR5007), or
“- - - - - (analog)”.
• When an HDMI IN is assigned to an
input selector in “HDMI Input
Setup” on page 54, the AV receiver
will select audio from HDMI IN as a
priority.
Digital Audio Input Setup
4
If you connect a component to a digital input jack, you
must assign that jack to an input selector. For example, if
you connect your CD player to the OPTICAL IN1 jack,
you should assign that jack to the CD input selector. By
default, the COAXIAL IN1 jack is assigned to the DVD/
BD input selector, although this can be changed.
Here are the default assignments.
Default assignment
Input selector
(TX-NR3007)
COAX1
(TX-NR5007)
COAX1
DVD/BD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME
COAX2
COAX3
OPT1
COAX2
COAX3
OPT1
FRONT (Fixed)
- - - - -
OPT2
- - - - - (Fixed)
OPT3
• Press the [ENTER] button when you
do not use the signal of audio from
the HDMI IN. The “ ” mark is dis-
*
AUX 1
AUX 2
FRONT (Fixed)
- - - - -
played like “COAX1 ”.
*
• “AUX 1” is used only for digital
input from the front panel terminals.
TV/TAPE
TUNER
CD
- - - - -
- - - - - (Fixed)
OPT2
Examples:
If you connect your DVD player to the
OPTICAL IN 1 jack, set “DVD/BD” to
“OPT1”.
PHONO
PORT
- - - - -
- - - - -
- - - - -
- - - - -
Press the [RECEIVER] button fol-
lowed by the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make
sure the appropriate external input is
selected on your TV.
If you want to listen to audio from the
component connected to the OPTICAL
IN 2 jack when the VCR/DVR input
selector is selected, set “VCR/DVR” to
“OPT2”.
If you want to listen to audio from the
component connected to the
COAXIAL IN 1 jack when the CBL/
SAT input selector is selected, set
“CBL/SAT” to “COAX1”.
1
2
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “1. Input/Output
Assign”, and then press
[ENTER].
The “Input/Output Assign” menu
appears.
For input selectors that you don’t want
to assign a digital input jack, set to
“- - - - - (analog)”.
Press the [SETUP] button.
The setup menu closes.
5
1. Input/Output Assign
1. Monitor Out
2. HDMI Input
3. Component Video Input
4. Digital Audio Input
5. Analog Audio Input
Notes:
• Available sampling rate for PCM signals from a
digital input (optical and coaxial) is 32/44.1/48/88.2/
96 kHz/16, 20, 24 bit.
• If you connect an input component (such as UP-A1
Dock that seated iPod) to the UNIVERSAL PORT
jack, you cannot assign any input to PORT selector.
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [SETUP] button, arrow buttons,
and [ENTER] button.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “4. Digital Audio
Input”, and then press [ENTER].
The “Digital Audio Input” menu
appears.
3
1–4. Digital Audio Input
DVD/BD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME
COAX1
COAX2
COAX3
OPT1
AUX 1
FRONT
56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Time Setup—Continued
Analog Audio Input Setup
Press the [SETUP] button.
The setup menu closes.
5
If you connect a component to the AV receiver’s analog
multichannel input, you must assign that input to an
input selector. For example, if you connect your DVD/
BD player to the MULTI CH input, you must assign it to
the DVD/BD input selector.
Notes:
• To listen to the component connected to the multi-
channel input, press the [AUDIO] button and select
the “Audio selector” (see page 119).
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [SETUP] button, arrow buttons,
and [ENTER] button.
Press the [RECEIVER] button,
1
followed by the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make
sure the appropriate external input is
selected on your TV.
Speaker Settings
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
If you change these settings, you must run
Audyssey MultEQ XT Room Correction and
Speaker Setup again (see page 61).
2
®
tons to select “1. Input/Output
Assign”, and then press
[ENTER].
If the impedance of any speaker is 4 ohms or more but
less than 6, set the minimum speaker impedance to 4
ohms.
To use bi-amping or bridging, you must change the
“Speakers Type(FrontA)” or “Speakers Type(FrontB)”
setting. For hookup information, see pages 23 to 26.
The “Input/Output Assign” menu
appears.
1. Input/Output Assign
1. Monitor Out
2. HDMI Input
3. Component Video Input
4. Digital Audio Input
5. Analog Audio Input
Notes:
• When bridging is used, the AV receiver is able to drive
up to 7.2 speakers in the main room.
• When bi-amping is used, the AV receiver is able to
drive up to 7.2 speakers in the main room.
• Before you change these settings, turn down the
volume.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
3
tons to select “5. Analog Audio
Input”, and then press [ENTER].
The “Analog Audio Input” menu
appears.
Press the [RECEIVER] button,
1
followed by the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make
sure the appropriate external input is
selected on your TV.
1–5. Analog Audio Input
Multich
Subwoofer Input Sensitivity
- - - - -
Use the Left and Right [e]/[r]
buttons to select an input selec-
tor.
4
You can assign the multichannel input
to the following input selectors: “DVD/
BD”, “VCR/DVR”, “CBL/SAT”,
“GAME”, “AUX 1”, “AUX 2”, “TV/
TAPE”, “CD”, or “PHONO”. If you
don’t want to assign the multichannel
input, set to “- - - - -”.
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Time Setup—Continued
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
Notes:
2
3
4
tons to select “2. Speaker
Setup”, and then press [ENTER].
• “Bi-Amp” and “BTL” cannot be
selected if “Speakers Type(FrontB)”
is set to “Bi-Amp” or “BTL”.
• Surround back speakers and
Powered Zone 3 cannot be used if
you select “Bi-Amp” or “BTL”.
The “Speaker Setup” menu appears.
2. Speaker Setup
1. Speaker Settings
2. Speaker Configuration
3. Speaker Distance
4. Level Calibration
5. Equalizer Settings
6. THX Audio Setup
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “Speakers
Type(FrontB)”, and use the Left
and Right [e]/[r] buttons to
select:
6
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “1. Speaker Set-
tings”, and then press [ENTER].
The “Speaker Settings” menu appears.
Not Use: Select this if you’re not using
speakers B.
Normal: Select this if you’ve con-
nected your front speakers B
normally.
2–1. Speaker Settings
Bi-Amp: Select this if you’ve con-
nected your front speakers B
for bi-amped operation.
BTL: Select this if you’ve con-
nected your front speakers B
for bridged operation. The
BTL indicator will appear on
the display.
Speaker Impedance
Speakers Type(FrontA)
Speakers Type(FrontB)
Powered Zone2
6ohms
Normal
Not Use
Not Act
Not Act
Powered Zone3
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “Speaker Imped-
ance”, and then use the Left and
Right [e]/[r] buttons to select:
Notes:
• “Bi-Amp” and “BTL” cannot be
selected if “Speakers Type(FrontA)”
is set to “Bi-Amp” or “BTL”.
• Front high speakers, front wide
speakers and Powered Zone 2 cannot
be used if you select other than “Not
Use”.
• Surround back, front high, and front
wide speakers and Powered Zone 3
cannot be used if you select
“Bi-Amp” or “BTL”.
4ohms: Select if the impedance of any
speaker is 4 ohms or more but
less than 6.
6ohms: Select if the impedances of all
speakers are between 6 and
16 ohms.
Note:
When bridging is used, “Speaker
Impedance” setting is fixed at
“8ohms”.
Press the [SETUP] button.
The setup menu closes.
7
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “Speakers
Type(FrontA)”, and then use the
Left and Right [e]/[r] buttons to
select:
5
Powered Zone 2/3
Normal: Select this if you’ve con-
nected your front speakers A
normally.
See “Setting the Powered Zone 2/3” on page 134.
Bi-Amp: Select this if you’ve con-
nected your front speakers A
for bi-amped operation.
BTL: Select this if you’ve con-
nected your front speakers A
for bridged operation. The
BTL indicator will appear on
the display.
Note:
This procedure can also be performed on the AV receiver
by using its [SETUP] button, arrow buttons, and
[ENTER] button.
58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Time Setup—Continued
TV Format Setup (European and
Asian models)
When you’ve finished, press the
[SETUP] button.
The setup menu closes.
5
For the onscreen setup menus to display properly, you
must specify the TV system used in your area.
Press the [RECEIVER] button fol-
1
Note:
lowed by the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make
sure the appropriate external input is
selected on your TV.
This procedure can also be performed on the AV receiver
by using its [SETUP] button, arrow buttons, and
[ENTER] button.
FM/AM Frequency Step Setup
For FM/AM tuning to work properly, you must specify
the FM/AM frequency step used in your area. Note that
when this setting is changed, all radio presets are
deleted.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
2
tons to select “6. Miscella-
neous”, and then press [ENTER].
Press the [RECEIVER] button,
1
followed by the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make
sure the appropriate external input is
selected on your TV.
The “Miscellaneous” menu appears.
6. Miscellaneous
1. Volume Setup
2. OSD Setup
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
3
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
2
tons to select “2. OSD Setup”,
and then press [ENTER].
tons to select “7. Hardware
Setup”, and then press [ENTER].
The “OSD Setup” menu appears.
The “Hardware Setup” menu appears.
6–2. OSD Setup
7. Hardware Setup
Immediate Display
Display Position
TV Format
On
Bottom
Auto
1. Remote ID
2. Multi Zone
3. Tuner
Language
English
4. HDMI
5. Network
6. Firmware Update
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “TV Format”, and
then use the Left and Right
[e]/[r] buttons to select:
4
Auto: Select this to automatically
detect the TV system from the
video input signals.
NTSC: Select if the TV system in
your area is NTSC.
PAL: Select if the TV system in
your area is PAL.
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Time Setup—Continued
GAME
TV/TAPE
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
3
tons to select “3. Tuner”, and
then press [ENTER].
The “Tuner” menu appears.
(North American models)
7–3. Tuner
FM/AM Frequency Step
SAT Radio Mode
200kHz/10kHz
None
VCR/DVR
(European and Asian models)
Press the [TV/TAPE], [GAME] or
[VCR/DVR] input selector button
so that “TV/TAPE”, “GAME” or
“VCR/DVR” appears on the dis-
play.
1
7–3. Tuner
AM Frequency Step
9kHz
Use the Left and Right [e]/[r]
buttons to select:
4
or
or
(North American models)
200kHz/10kHz:
Select if 200 kHz/10 kHz steps are
used in your area.
50kHz/9kHz:
Select if 50 kHz/9 kHz steps are
used in your area.
(European and Asian models)
10kHz: Select if 10 kHz steps are
used in your area.
9kHz: Select if 9 kHz steps are used
in your area.
Press and hold down the [TV/
TAPE], [GAME] or [VCR/DVR]
input selector button (about 3
seconds) to change the setting.
Repeat this step to select MD, CDR, or
DOCK.
2
Press the [SETUP] button.
The setup menu closes.
5
or
or
For the TV/TAPE input selector, the
setting changes in this order:
TV/TAPE → MD → CDR
Note:
→
DOCK
This procedure can also be performed on the AV receiver
by using its [SETUP] button, arrow buttons, and
[ENTER] button.
For the GAME input selector, the
setting changes in this order:
GAME ↔ DOCK
For the VCR/DVR input selector, the
setting changes in this order:
VCR/DVR ↔ DOCK
Changing the Input Display
If you connect an u-capable Onkyo MiniDisc
recorder, CD recorder, or RI Dock to the TV/TAPE IN/
OUT jacks, or connect an RI Dock to the GAME IN or
VCR/DVR IN jacks, for u to work properly, you must
change this setting.
(3 seconds)
Notes:
• DOCK can be selected for the TV/TAPE or GAME or
VCR/DVR input selector, but not at the same time.
• Enter the appropriate remote control code before
using the AV receiver’s remote controller for the first
time (see page 141).
This setting can only be changed on the AV receiver.
60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Time Setup—Continued
Measurement Positions
Audyssey MultEQ® XT Room
Correction and Speaker Setup
To create a listening environment in your home theater
that all listeners will enjoy, Audyssey MultEQ XT takes
measurements at up to eight positions within the
listening area.
With the supplied calibrated microphone,
Audyssey MultEQ XT automatically determines the
number of speakers connected, their size for purposes of
bass management, optimum crossover frequencies to the
subwoofer (if present), and distances from the primary
listening position.
Audyssey MultEQ XT then removes the distortion
caused by room acoustics by capturing room acoustical
and time domain. The result is clear, well-balanced
sound for everyone. Enabling Audyssey MultEQ XT
allows you to also use Audyssey Dynamic EQ , which
maintains the proper octave-to-octave balance at any
volume level (see page 102).
Before using this function, connect and position all of
your speakers.
■ First measurement point
Also referred to as the Main Listening Position this
refers to the most central position where one would
normally sit within the listening environment.
MultEQ XT uses the measurements from this posi-
tion to calculate speaker distance, level, polarity, and
the optimum crossover value for the subwoofer.
■ Second−eighth measurement positions
These are the other listening positions (i.e., the
places where the other listeners will sit). You can
measure up to eight positions.
™
The following examples show some typical home theater
seating arrangements. Choose the one that best matches
yours, and position the microphone accordingly when
prompted.
If Audyssey Dynamic EQ is set to “On”,
™
Audyssey Dynamic Volume becomes available.
About Audyssey Dynamic EQ
Audyssey Dynamic EQ solves the problem of deterio-
rating sound quality as volume is decreased by taking
into account human perception and room acoustics.
Dynamic EQ selects the correct frequency response
and surround levels moment-by-moment at any user-
selected volume setting. The result is bass response,
tonal balance, and surround impression that remain
constant despite changes in volume. Dynamic EQ
combines information from incoming source levels
with actual output sound levels in the room, a prereq-
uisite for delivering a loudness correction solution.
Audyssey Dynamic EQ works in tandem with
Audyssey MultEQ XT to provide well-balanced
sound for every listener at any volume level.
TV
TV
TV
TV
TV
TV
TV
TV
TV
About Audyssey Dynamic Volume
Audyssey Dynamic Volume solves the problem of
large variations in volume level between television
programs, commercials, and between the soft and loud
passages of movies. Dynamic Volume looks at the pre-
ferred volume setting by the user and then monitors
how the volume of program material is being per-
ceived by listeners in real time to decide whether an
adjustment is needed. Whenever necessary, Dynamic
Volume makes the necessary rapid or gradual adjust-
ments to maintain the desired playback volume level
while optimizing the dynamic range.
: listening area
: listening position
–
Audyssey Dynamic EQ is integrated into Dynamic
Volume so that as the playback volume is adjusted
automatically, the perceived bass response, tonal bal-
ance, surround impression, and dialog clarity remain
the same whether watching movies, flipping between
television channels, or changing from stereo to sur-
round sound content.
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Time Setup—Continued
®
Using Audyssey MultEQ XT
Turn on the AV receiver and the
connected TV.
On the TV, select the input to which the
AV receiver is connected.
1
2
ON/STANDBY
Set the speaker setup micro-
phone at the Main Listening Posi-
tion a (page 61), and connect it
to the SETUP MIC jack.
The speaker setting menu appears.
MultEQ XT: Auto Setup
Speakers Type(FrontA)
Speakers Type(FrontB)
Not Use
Not Act
Speaker setup
microphone
Powered Zone3
If you change these settings, refer to
step 5 on “Speaker Settings” (page 57)
or step 4 on “Setting the Powered
Zone 2/3” (page 134).
When you’ve finished, press the
[ENTER] button.
3
qwer
MultEQ XT: Auto Setup
ENTER
Please place setup microphone at
center of listening area at
ear height.
Next
Notes:
Notes:
• If any of your speakers is 4 ohms, change
“Speaker Impedance” setting before running
Audyssey MultEQ XT Room Correction and
Speaker Setup (see page 57).
• If the AV receiver is muted, it will be unmuted
automatically when Audyssey MultEQ XT
Room Correction and Speaker Setup starts.
• Room correction and speaker setup can only be
used with Speakers A.
• Room correction and speaker setup cannot be
performed while a pair of headphones is
connected, or Speakers B is selected.
• It takes about 30 minutes to complete the room
correction and speaker setup for eight positions.
Total measurement time varies depending on the
number of speakers.
• Before starting Audyssey MultEQ
XT Room Correction and Speaker
Setup, arrange the room and connect
the speakers as you would for
enjoying movies. Changes to the
room after auto setup requires you
run the auto setup again, as room EQ
characteristics may have changed.
• When starting the room correction
and speaker setup, do not stand
between the speakers and
microphone, and avoid obstacles
blocking the path between speakers
and microphone. This will produce
inaccurate results.
• Position the microphone at ear height
of a seated listener with the
• Do not disconnect the speaker setup microphone
during the room correction and speaker setup,
unless you want to cancel the setup.
• Do not connect or disconnect any speakers during
the room correction and speaker setup.
microphone tip pointed directly at
the ceiling using a tripod. Do not
hold the microphone in your hand
during measurements as this will
produce inacurate results.
62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Time Setup—Continued
When prompted, place the setup
microphone at the next position,
and repeat step 5.
• Make the room as quiet as possible.
Background noise can disrupt the
room measurements. Close
windows, silence cell phones,
televisions, radios, air conditioners,
fluorescent lights, home appliances,
light dimmers, or other devices.
• Cell phones should be turned off or
placed away from all audio
6
7
After the 3rd to the 8th measure-
ment, the following screen
appears.
MultEQ XT: Auto Setup
electronics during the measurement
process as Radio Frequency
Interference (RFI) may cause
measurement disruptions (even if the
cell phone is not in use).
Please select [Next], when measuring next position,
and select [Finish], when ending.
Next
Finish(Calculate)
Press [ENTER].
4
The room correction and speaker setup
starts.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select an option, and then
press [ENTER].
MultEQ XT: Auto Setup
Next:
Select “Next” to begin measuring
the next measurement position.
After the 8th measurement has been
taken, the procedure automatically
proceeds to step 8.
Do not unplug setup microphone.
Please keep quiet.
Now measuring. . .
Finish(Calculate):
Test tones are played through each
speaker as Audyssey MultEQ XT
Room Correction and Speaker Setup
runs. This process takes a few minutes.
Please refrain from talking during
measurements and do not stand
Select this if you don’t want to
measure any more listening posi-
tions and are ready to calculate the
results, then go to step 8.
®
When the measurements are
complete, the following screen
appears.
8
between speakers and the microphone.
The following screen appears.
5
MultEQ XT: Auto Setup
MultEQ XT: Auto Setup
Calculating...
Please place setup microphone at 2nd position at
ear height.
Next
Place the setup microphone at
the next position (page 61), and
then press [ENTER].
Audyssey MultEQ XT performs more
measurements. This takes a few
minutes.
MultEQ XT: Auto Setup
Do not unplug setup microphone.
Please keep quiet.
Now measuring. . .
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Time Setup—Continued
Notes:
When the calculations are com-
plete, the following screen
appears.
9
• When the room correction and speaker setup is
complete, the “Equalizer Settings” (page 98) will be
set to “Audyssey” and “Dynamic EQ” (page 102) will
be set to “On”.
MultEQ XT: Auto Setup
• You can cancel the Room Correction and Speaker
Setup at any point in this procedure simply by
disconnecting the setup microphone.
-- Review SP Configuration --
Subwoofer
Front
No
Full Band
40Hz
Center
Surround
Front Wide
Front High
Surr Back
Surr Back Ch
120Hz
Full Band
Full Band
150Hz
Error Messages
2ch
While the room correction and speaker setup is in
progress, one of the following error messages may
appear:
Save
Cancel
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select an option, and then
press [ENTER].
❏ Ambient noise is too high.
MultEQ XT: Auto Setup
The options are:
Save:
Ambient noise is too high.
Save the calculated settings and exit
the room correction and speaker
setup.
Cancel:
Retry
Cancel
Cancel the room correction and
speaker setup.
This message appears if the background noise is too
loud and the measurements cannot be performed
properly.
Note:
You can view the calculated settings for
the speaker configuration, speaker dis-
tances, and speaker levels by using the
Left and Right [e]/[r] buttons.
Remove the source of the noise and try again.
Retry: Return to the measured point immediately
before and start set up again.
Cancel: Cancel the room correction and speaker setup.
If you selected “Save”, the results are
saved, and the following screen
appears.
10
11
This message appears if a speaker is not detected. “Yes”
means that a speaker was detected. “No” means that no
speaker was detected.
MultEQ XT: Auto Setup
Tip:
See “Speaker Configuration” (page 19) for appropriate
settings.
Saving...
MultEQ XT: Auto Setup
Speaker Detect Error
FL
:
:
:
:
:
:
No
---
---
---
---
---
FR
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
SL
SR
FWL
FHL
SBL
C
FWR
FHR
SBR
SW1
SW2
Disconnect the speaker setup
microphone.
Retry
MultEQ XT: Auto Setup
Cancel
The front speaker has not been detected.
Please, unplug setup microphone.
64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Time Setup—Continued
MultEQ XT: Auto Setup
Speaker Detect Error
MultEQ XT: Auto Setup
Speaker Detect Error
FL
SL
FWL
FHL
SBL
C
:
:
:
:
:
:
Yes
---
No
Yes
---
FR
SR
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Yes
No
No
Yes
---
FL
SL
FWL
FHL
SBL
C
:
:
:
:
:
:
Yes
---
Yes
Yes
---
FR
SR
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
No
---
Yes
Yes
---
FWR
FHR
SBR
SW1
SW2
FWR
FHR
SBR
SW1
SW2
Yes
---
---
Yes
---
---
Retry
Retry
Cancel
Cancel
One of the front speakers has not been detected.
The front high speakers have been detected but the
surround speakers haven’t.
MultEQ XT: Auto Setup
Speaker Detect Error
MultEQ XT: Auto Setup
Speaker Detect Error
FL
SL
FWL
FHL
SBL
C
:
:
:
:
:
:
Yes
---
Yes
Yes
---
FR
SR
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
---
---
No
Yes
---
FL
:
:
:
:
:
:
Yes
---
FR
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Yes
No
Yes
No
---
FWR
FHR
SBR
SW1
SW2
SL
SR
FWL
FHL
SBL
C
Yes
No
---
FWR
FHR
SBR
SW1
SW2
Yes
---
---
Yes
---
---
Retry
Cancel
Retry
Cancel
One of the front wide speakers has not been
detected.
The front wide speakers have been detected but the
surround speakers haven’t.
MultEQ XT: Auto Setup
Speaker Detect Error
MultEQ XT: Auto Setup
Speaker Detect Error
FL
SL
FWL
FHL
SBL
C
:
:
:
:
:
:
Yes
---
Yes
Yes
---
FR
SR
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
---
---
---
No
---
---
---
FL
:
:
:
:
:
:
Yes
---
FR
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
---
FWR
FHR
SBR
SW1
SW2
SL
SR
FWL
FHL
SBL
C
Yes
Yes
No
FWR
FHR
SBR
SW1
SW2
Yes
Yes
---
Retry
Cancel
Retry
Cancel
One of the front high speakers has not been detected.
The right surround back speaker has been detected
but the left surround back speaker hasn’t.
MultEQ XT: Auto Setup
Speaker Detect Error
FL
SL
FWL
FHL
SBL
C
:
:
:
:
:
:
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
FR
SR
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
---
MultEQ XT: Auto Setup
Speaker Detect Error
FWR
FHR
SBR
SW1
SW2
FL
:
:
:
:
:
:
Yes
---
FR
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Yes
No
No
No
No
---
SL
SR
FWL
FHL
SBL
C
No
No
Yes
Yes
FWR
FHR
SBR
SW1
SW2
---
Retry
Cancel
---
One of the surround speakers has not been detected.
Retry
Cancel
MultEQ XT: Auto Setup
Speaker Detect Error
The left surround back speaker has been detected but
the surround speaker hasn’t.
FL
SL
FWL
FHL
SBL
C
:
:
:
:
:
:
Yes
---
No
No
---
FR
SR
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
---
FWR
FHR
SBR
SW1
SW2
MultEQ XT: Auto Setup
Speaker Detect Error
Yes
FL
SL
FWL
FHL
SBL
C
:
:
:
:
:
:
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
FR
SR
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
---
FWR
FHR
SBR
SW1
SW2
Retry
Cancel
The surround back speakers have been detected but
the surround speakers haven’t.
Yes
Retry
Cancel
Subwoofer 2 has been detected but Subwoofer 1 has
not.
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Time Setup—Continued
Changing the Speaker Settings Manually
MultEQ XT: Auto Setup
Speaker Detect Error
If you wish to make changes to the settings found during
the room correction and speaker setup, follow the
directions on pages 95 to 98.
FL
SL
FWL
FHL
SBL
C
:
:
:
:
:
:
Error
Yes
---
---
Yes
Yes
FR
SR
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Yes
Yes
---
FWR
FHR
SBR
SW1
SW2
---
Yes
Yes
Yes
Notes:
speakers be set to “80Hz(THX)”. If you set up your
speakers using Audyssey MultEQ XT Room
Correction and Speaker Setup, please make sure
manually that any THX speakers are set to 80 Hz
(THX) crossover (see page 95).
Retry
Cancel
The speaker type detected does not match what was
expected. The speaker may be incorrect type or bro-
ken. Please check that it is the correct speaker type.
• Sometimes due to the electrical complexities of
subwoofers and the interaction with the room, THX
recommends setting the level and the distance of the
subwoofer manually.
❏ Speaker Matching Error!
MultEQ XT: Auto Setup
• Sometimes due to interaction with the room, you may
notice irregular results when setting the level and/or
distance of the main speakers. If this happens, THX
recommends setting them manually.
Speaker Matching Error!
Retry
Cancel
Using Powered Subwoofers
The number of speakers detected on the second mea-
surement and later was different to the number
detected on the first measurement.
If you’re using powered subwoofers that output very
low-frequency sound at a low volume level, it may not be
detected by Audyssey MultEQ XT Room Correction
®
Make sure speakers that could not be detected are
connected properly.
Retry: Return to step 2 and try again.
Cancel: Cancel the room correction and speaker setup.
and Speaker Setup.
If the “Subwoofer” appears on the “Review SP
Configuration” screen as “No”, increase the subwoofer’s
volume to the half-way point, set it to its highest
crossover frequency, and then try running
Audyssey MultEQ XT Room Correction and Speaker
Setup again. Note that if the volume is set too high and
the sound distorts, detection issues may occur, so use an
appropriate volume level. If the subwoofer has a low-
pass filter switch, set it to Off or Direct. Refer to your
subwoofer’s instruction manual for details.
❏ Writing Error!
MultEQ XT: Auto Setup
Writing Error!
Retry
Cancel
This message appears if saving fails.
Try saving again. If this message appears after 2 or 3
attempts, the AV receiver is probably malfunctioning.
Contact your Onkyo dealer.
Retry: Return to step 2 and try again.
Cancel: Cancel the room correction and speaker setup.
66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Operations
Selecting the Input Source
This section explains how to select the input source (i.e., the AV component that you want to listen to or watch).
MASTER VOLUME
INPUT
SELECTOR
RECEIVER
VOL q/w
Input selector buttons
AV receiver
Remote
controller
Use the AV receiver’s input selector buttons to select the input
source.
1
To select the input source with the remote controller, press the
[RECEIVER] button, and then press the INPUT SELECTOR but-
tons.
or
Start playback on the source component.
2
3
When you select DVD or another video component, on your TV, you’ll need
to select the video input that’s connected to the AV receiver’s HDMI outputs,
COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT or MONITOR OUT.
On some DVD players, you may need to turn on the digital audio output.
To adjust the volume, use the MASTER VOLUME control, or the
AV receiver
Remote
controller
play).
or
The AV receiver is designed for home theater enjoyment. It has a wide volume
range, allowing precise adjustment.
The volume level can also be displayed as an absolute value. See “Volume
Setup” on page 110.
Select a listening mode and enjoy!
See “Using the Listening Modes” on page 81.
4
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Operations—Continued
Notes:
DISPLAY
• This setting is not available when the multichannel
Analog input is selected.
• The tone can be adjusted for Speakers A and Speakers
B individually.
• To bypass the bass and treble tone circuits, select the
Direct, Pure Audio or THX listening mode.
Displaying Source Information
You can display various information about the current
input source as follows.
TONE, e, r DIMMER
Remote
controller
Press the [RECEIVER] button,
DISPLAY
and then press the [DISPLAY]
button repeatedly to cycle
through the available informa-
tion.
Press
MUTING
[RECEIVER]
first.
SP LAYOUT
DIMMER
Note:
This procedure can also be performed on the AV receiver
by using its [DISPLAY] button.
SLEEP
The following information can typically be displayed for
input sources.
Input source
Listening
mode
Adjusting the Bass & Treble
You can adjust the bass and treble for the front speakers,
except when the Direct, Pure Audio or THX listening
mode is selected.
Signal format*
Sampling
frequency
Press the [TONE] button repeat-
edly to select either “Bass” or
“Treble” for each speaker or sub-
woofer.
1
AV receiver
Input Signal
Resolution
Output
Resolution
*
If the input signal is analog, no format information is displayed.
If the input signal is PCM, the sampling frequency is displayed.
If the input signal is digital but not PCM, the signal format and
the number of channels is displayed. For some digital input sig-
nals, including multichannel PCM, the signal format, number of
channels, and sampling frequency is displayed.
2
buttons to adjust.
AV receiver
Information is displayed for about three seconds, then the previ-
ously displayed information reappears.
Tip:
This procedure can also be performed
on the remote controller by using
[AUDIO] button (see page 117).
■ Bass
You can boost or cut low-frequency sounds output by the
front speakers from –10 dB to +10 dB in 2 dB steps.
■ Treble
You can boost or cut high-frequency sounds output by
the front speakers from –10 dB to +10 dB in 2 dB steps.
68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Operations—Continued
Setting the Display Brightness
Using the Sleep Timer
You can adjust the brightness of the AV receiver’s dis-
play.
With the sleep timer, you can set the AV receiver to turn
off automatically after a specified period.
Remote
controller
Press the [RECEIVER] button,
and then press the [DIMMER]
Remote
controller
Press the [RECEIVER] button,
and then press the [SLEEP] but-
button repeatedly to select:
• Normal + VOLUME light on.
• Normal + VOLUME light off.
• Dim + VOLUME light off.
• Dimmer + VOLUME light off.
Alternatively, you can use the AV
receiver’s [DIMMER] button (North
American models).
ton repeatedly to select the
required sleep time.
The sleep time can be set from 90 to 10
minutes in 10 minute steps.
The SLEEP indicator appears on the
display when the sleep timer has been
set. The specified sleep time appears on
the display for about five seconds, then
the previous display reappears.
If you need to cancel the sleep timer, press the [SLEEP]
button repeatedly until the SLEEP indicator disappears.
Muting the AV Receiver
You can temporarily mute the output of the AV receiver.
To check the time remaining until the AV receiver sleeps,
press the [SLEEP] button. Note that if you press the
[SLEEP] button while the sleep time is being displayed,
you’ll shorten the sleep time by 10 minutes.
Remote
controller
Press the [RECEIVER] button,
and then press the [MUTING] but-
ton.
The output is muted and the MUTING
indicator flashes on the display, as
shown.
To unmute the AV receiver, press the
[MUTING] button again, or adjust the
volume.
The Mute function is cancelled when
the AV receiver is set to Standby.
Tip:
You can specify how much the output is muted with the
“Muting Level” setting (page 110).
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Operations—Continued
Selecting Speaker Layout
Using Headphones
You can connect a pair of stereo headphones (1/4-inch
phone plug) to the AV receiver’s PHONES jack for pri-
vate listening, as shown.
Remote
controller
Press the [RECEIVER] button,
and then press the [SP LAYOUT]
button repeatedly.
Front High or Front Wide Speakers
Notes:
When “Speakers Type(FrontB)” setting is set to “Not
Use”, you can select the priority of the use of Front High
or Front Wide speakers.
• Always turn down the volume before connecting your
headphones.
• While the headphones plug is inserted in the PHONES
jack, the Headphone indicator, speaker/channel indi-
cator FL and FR light up. (The Powered Zone 2/3
speakers are not turned off.)
• When you connect a pair of headphones, the listening
mode is set to Stereo, unless it’s already set to Stereo,
Mono, Direct, Pure Audio or DTS Surround Sensa-
tion.
• Listening mode automatically changes into DTS sur-
round sensation when you connect a pair of head-
phones while DTS surround sensation mode is
currently selected.
Notes:
• Front High or Front Wide speakers cannot be selected
in either of the following cases:
1. “Speakers Type(FrontB)” is set to “Bi-Amp”,
“BTL”, or “Normal” (page 57).
2. Powered Zone 2 is being used (page 134).
• When the listening mode that doesn’t support Front
High or Front Wide speakers is used, the setting can-
not be selected.
• If you use surround back speakers, the speaker selec-
tion will be based on the combination of surround
back and front high speakers, or surround back and
front wide speakers.
• The following listening modes can be used with head-
phones (the listening modes available also depend on
the currently selected input source): Stereo, Direct,
Pure Audio, Mono and DTS Surround Sensation.
Speakers A or Speakers B Configuration
When “Speakers Type(FrontB)” setting is set to other
than “Not Use”, you can choose which of the speakers
you want to use with the Speakers A or Speakers B con-
figuration. Speakers A or B can be switched regardless
of listening modes.
Notes:
• When you use Speakers B configuration, you cannot
use front high and front wide speakers.
• When you use Speakers B configuration, listening
modes that require front high or front wide speakers
such as Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height or Audyssey
Dynamic Surround Expansion™ are unavailable.
• While you are using Speakers B, you cannot use
®
Audyssey MultEQ XT Room Correction and
Speaker Setup (Audyssey Dynamic EQ™ and
Audyssey Dynamic Volume™).
70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Operations—Continued
Using Easy Macros
MY MUSIC (default):
1. The Onkyo CD player connected
to the AV receiver is turned on.
2. The AV receiver is turned on.
3. The input selector of the AV
receiver is set to “CD”.
Using the Easy macro command in the Easy macro
mode, you can sequentially operate Onkyo components
with simple commands by simply pressing one button.
These commands are user-specifiable (see page 150) and
the default actions are described below. Press the
ACTIVITIES buttons to start the Easy macro command.
Once the AV receiver has entered the normal macro
mode, all of the ACTIVITIES buttons will automatically
switch to the normal macro mode. In this case, pressing
the [ALL OFF] button will set only the AV receiver to
Standby mode.
4. The player starts playback.
Note:
Once you start the Easy macro com-
mand, you cannot use other ACTIVI-
TIES buttons during the execution. If
you want to operate other components
halfway, press the [ALL OFF] to stop
and press desired ACTIVITIES button.
ACTIVITIES
buttons
Press the [ALL OFF] button.
1. The connected component stops
and turns off.
2. The AV receiver turns off.
3. The TV connected to the AV
2
ALL OFF,
MY MOVIE,
MY TV,
MY MUSIC
RECEIVER
*2*3
receiver turns off (Standby).
*1. Depending on the start-up time of the DVD/BD player, the AV
receiver may not activate this playback command. In this case,
press the Play [1] button on the remote controller.
*2. When [MY MUSIC] is selected, with the default settings, this
will not be performed.
*3. With some televisions, the power may not be turned off (or enter
standby).
AUDIO
Press the [MY MOVIE], [MY TV],
or [MY MUSIC] button.
1
MY MOVIE (default):
1. The TV connected to the AV
receiver is turned on.
2. The Onkyo DVD player con-
nected to the AV receiver is turned
on.
3. The AV receiver is turned on.
4. The input selector of the AV
receiver is set to “DVD/BD”.
*1
5. The player starts playback.
MY TV (default):
1. The TV connected to the AV
receiver is turned on.
2. The cable set-top box connected to
the AV receiver is turned on.
3. The AV receiver is turned on.
4. The input selector of the AV
receiver is set to “CBL/SAT”. You
can enjoy cable TV.
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Operations—Continued
Changing Source Component
Restoring Default
While holding down the [AUDIO]
When you want to operate the component that is not
assigned as the source component, you can assign it as
the source component. For the default assignment, see
page 151.
1
button, press and hold down the
[ALL OFF] button until the [ALL
OFF] button lights up (about 3
seconds).
While holding down the REMOTE
MODE button, press and hold
down the [MY MOVIE], [MY TV],
or [MY MUSIC] button (about 3
seconds).
The ACTIVITIES buttons that you
pressed flashes twice, indicating that
the setting has been established.
(3 seconds)
Release the [AUDIO] and [ALL
OFF] buttons and press the [ALL
OFF] button again.
2
Examples:
When you press the [MY MUSIC] but-
ton and want to start the Onkyo Cas-
sette recorder, while holding down
[TV/TAPE] button, press and hold
down the [MY MUSIC] button (about
The [ALL OFF] button flashes twice.
3 seconds) flashes twice.
(3 seconds)
Tip:
This procedure can also be performed
via onscreen menu (see page 150).
72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the Radio
Using the Tuner
TUNED
AUTO
With the built-in tuner you can enjoy AM and FM radio
stations. You can store your favorite stations as presets
for quick selection.
FM STEREO
TUNER
■ Manual Tuning Mode
Press the [TUNING MODE] but-
ton so that the AUTO indicator
disappears from the display.
1
TUNING MODE TUNING
/
Press and hold the TUNING Up or
Down [q]/[w] buttons.
Press the buttons repeatedly to change
the frequency one step at a time.
2
Listening to the Radio
The frequency stops changing when
you release the button.
Use the [TUNER] input selector
button to select either AM or FM.
In this example, FM has been selected.
Each time you press the [TUNER] but-
ton, the input source changes between
AM and FM.
This model changes FM/AM frequency in 200k/10k (or
50k/9k) Hz steps.
In Manual Tuning mode, FM stations will be in mono.
Band
Frequency
Tuning into weak FM stereo stations
If the signal from a stereo FM station is weak, it may be
impossible to get good reception. In this case, switch to
Manual Tuning mode and listen to the station in mono.
(Actual display depends on country.)
Tuning into Radio Stations
■ Auto Tuning Mode
■ Tuning into Stations by Frequency
You can tune into AM and FM stations directly by enter-
ing the appropriate frequency.
Press the [TUNING MODE] but-
ton so that the AUTO indicator
appears on the display.
Press the [TUNER] button repeat-
edly to select AM or FM, followed
by the [D.TUN] button.
1
1
Remote
controller
Press the TUNING Up or Down
[q]/[w] buttons.
(Actual display depends on country.)
2
Searching stops when a station is
found.
Within 8 seconds, use the num-
2
ber buttons to enter the fre-
quency of the radio station.
For example, to tune to 87.5 (FM),
press 8, 7, 5.
When tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator
appears. When tuned into a stereo FM station, the FM
STEREO indicator appears on the display, as shown.
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the Radio—Continued
AV receiver
Presetting AM/FM Stations
To select a preset, use the PRE-
SET [e]/[r] buttons, or the
remote controller’s CH [+/–] but-
ton.
MEMORY PRESET e/r
or
Remote
controller
You can store a combination of up to 40 of your favorite
AM/FM radio stations as presets.
or
Tune into the AM/FM station that
you want to store as a preset.
Remote
controller
1
You can also use the remote con-
troller’s number buttons to select
a preset directly.
Press the [MEMORY] button.
The preset number flashes.
2
While the preset number is flash-
3
Deleting Presets
ing (about 8 seconds), use the
PRESET [e]/[r] buttons to
MEMORY, TUNING MODE
select a preset from 1 through 40.
Press the [MEMORY] button
again to store the station or
channel.
4
The station or channel is stored and the
preset number stops flashing.
Repeat this procedure for all of your
favorite AM/FM radio stations.
Select the preset that you want to
delete.
See the previous section.
1
2
Note:
You can name your radio presets for easy identification
(see page 105). Its name is displayed instead of the band
and frequency.
While holding down the [MEM-
ORY] button, press the [TUNING
MODE] button.
Selecting Presets
The preset is deleted and its number
disappears from the display.
PRESET e/r
74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the Radio—Continued
RDS Program Types (PTY)
Using RDS (European models)
RDS only works in areas where RDS broadcasts are
available.
When tuned into an RDS station, the RDS indicator
appears.
Type
Display
None
None
News reports
Current affairs
Information
Sport
News
Affairs
RDS indicator
Info
Sport
Education
Educate
Drama
Culture
Science
Varied
Drama
Culture
■ What is RDS?
Science and technology
Varied
RDS stands for Radio Data System and is a method of
transmitting data in FM radio signals. It was developed
by the European Broadcasting Union (EBU) and is avail-
able in most European countries. Many FM stations use
it these days. In addition to displaying text information,
RDS can also help you find radio stations by type (e.g.,
news, sport, rock, etc.).
Pop music
Rock music
Middle of the road music
Light classics
Serious classics
Other music
Weather
Pop M
Rock M
Easy M
Light M
Classics
Other M
Weather
Finance
Children
Social
The AV receiver supports four types of RDS informa-
tion:
PS (Program Service)
Finance
When tuned to an RDS station that’s broadcasting PS
information, the station’s name will be displayed. Press-
3 seconds.
Children’s programmes
Social affairs
Religion
Religion
Phone In
Travel
Phone in
RT (Radio Text)
Travel
information, the text will be shown on the display (see
page 76).
Leisure
Leisure
Jazz
Jazz music
Country music
National music
Oldies music
Folk music
Documentary
Alarm test
Country
Nation M
Oldies
PTY (Program Type)
This allows you to search for RDS radio stations by type
(see page 76).
Folk M
Document
TEST
TP (Traffic Program)
This allows you to search for RDS radio stations that
broadcast traffic information (see page 76).
Alarm
Alarm!
Notes:
• In some cases, the text characters displayed on the AV
receiver may not be identical to those broadcast by the
radio station. Also, unexpected characters may be dis-
played when unsupported characters are received.
This is not a malfunction.
• If the signal from an RDS station is weak, RDS data
may be displayed intermittently or not at all.
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to the Radio—Continued
When tuned to an RDS station that’s broadcasting text information, the text can be displayed.
Displaying Radio Text (RT)
To start the search, press
[ENTER].
3
The AV receiver searches until it finds
a station of the type you specified, at
which point it stops briefly before con-
tinuing with the search.
When a station you want to listen
to is found, press [ENTER].
If no stations are found, the message
“Not Found” appears.
4
RT/PTY/TP
Press the [RT/PTY/TP] button
once.
Listening to Traffic News (TP)
The RT information scrolls across the
display.
Notes:
• The message “Waiting” may appear while the AV
receiver waits for the RT information.
• If the message “No Text Data” appears on the display,
no RT information is available.
RT/PTY/TP ENTER
Finding Stations by Type (PTY)
You can search for stations that broadcast traffic news.
Press the [RT/PTY/TP] button
three times.
PRESET e/r
1
If the current radio station is broadcast-
ing TP (Traffic Program), “[TP]” will
appear on the display, and traffic news
will be heard as and when it’s broad-
cast. If “TP” without square brackets
appears, this means that the station is
not broadcasting TP.
RT/PTY/TP ENTER
To locate a station that is broad-
2
casting TP, press [ENTER].
The AV receiver searches until it finds
a station that’s broadcasting TP.
If no stations are found, the message
“Not Found” appears.
You can search for radio stations by type.
Press the [RT/PTY/TP] button
twice.
The current program type appears on
the display.
1
Use the PRESET [e]/[r] buttons
2
to select the type of program you
want.
See the table on page 75.
76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Universal Port Option UP-A1 Dock for iPod
Operating Notes:
• Functionality depends on your iPod model and gener-
About the UP-A1 Dock
ation.
With the UP-A1 Dock (sold separately), you can easily
play the music, photo, or movie stored on your Apple
iPod through the AV receiver and enjoy great sound. You
can use the AV receiver’s remote controller to operate
your iPod.
• Before selecting a different input source, stop iPod
playback to prevent the AV receiver from selecting the
iPod input source by mistake.
• If any accessories are connected to your iPod, the AV
receiver may not be able to select the input source
properly.
• While your iPod is in the UP-A1 Dock, its volume
control has no effect. If you adjust your iPod models
volume control while it’s in the UP-A1 Dock, make
sure it’s not set too high before you reconnect your
headphones.
For the latest information on the Dock, see the Onkyo
Web site at: http://www.onkyo.com
iPod adapter
• The Auto Power On function will not work if you set
your iPod in the UP-A1 Dock while it is playing.
• When Zone 2 or 3 is turned on, you can’t use Auto
Power On and Direct Change functions.
Dock connector
■ Using Your iPod models Alarm Clock
You can use your iPod models Alarm Clock function to
automatically turn on your iPod and the AV receiver at a
specified time. The AV receiver’s input source will auto-
matically be set to the [PORT] selector.
Compatible iPod models
For information about which iPod models are sup-
ported by the UP-A1 Dock, see the UP-A1 Dock
instruction manual.
Notes:
• To use this function, your iPod must be in the UP-A1
Dock, and the UP-A1 Dock must be connected to the
AV receiver.
• When you use this function, be sure to set the AV
receiver’s volume control to a suitable level.
• The AV receiver may take several seconds to startup,
so you might not hear the first few seconds of the first
song.
Note:
Before using the UP-A1 Dock, update your iPod with the
latest software, available from the Apple Web site.
Function Overview
■ Basic Operation
• When Zone 2 or 3 is turned on, you can’t use this func-
tion.
• You cannot use this function for sound effects on your
iPod.
Note:
The AV receiver may take several seconds to startup, so
you might not hear the first few seconds of the first song.
• Auto Power On Function
■ Charging Your iPod models Battery
The UP-A1 Dock charges your iPod models battery
while your iPod is in the UP-A1 Dock and connected to
the UNIVERSAL PORT jacks on the AV receiver. While
your iPod is seated in the UP-A1 Dock, its battery will
be charged when the AV receiver is set to “On” or
“Standby”.
If you start iPod playback while the AV receiver is
on Standby, the AV receiver will automatically turn
on and select your iPod as the input source.
• Direct Change Function
If you start iPod playback while listening to another
input source, the AV receiver will automatically
select your iPod as the input source.
Note:
• Using the AV receiver's Remote Controller
You can use the AV receiver’s remote controller to
control basic iPod functions.
When UP-A1 Dock that seated iPod is connected, the
power consumption on standby mode slightly increases.
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Universal Port Option UP-A1 Dock for iPod—Continued
a Arrow [q]/[w] and ENTER buttons
Controlling iPod
Used to navigate menus and select items.
By pressing the REMOTE MODE button that’s been
programmed with the remote control code for your
Dock, you can control your iPod in the Dock with the
following buttons.
The [PORT] button is preprogrammed with the remote
control code for controlling a Dock with Universal Port
connector.
b Previous [7] button
Restarts the current song. Press it again to select the
previous song.
c Fast Reverse [5] button
Press and hold to fast reverse.
d Pause [3] button
Pauses playback. Press it again to start playback.
For details on entering a remote control code, see
page 141.
e REPEAT button
Used with the repeat function.
When Using a Dock with Universal Port connector:
• Connect the Dock to the UNIVERSAL PORT jack.
• See the Dock’s instruction manual for more informa-
tion.
You can control your iPod when “PORT” is selected as
the input source.
f DISPLAY button
*1
Select Standard or Extended mode .
g MUTING button (69)
Mutes or unmutes the AV receiver.
h ALBUM +/– button
Selects the next or previous album.
Press [PORT] button first.
i VOL [q]/[w] button (67)
Adjusts the volume of the AV receiver.
j PLAYLIST [e]/[r] buttons
f
Selects the previous or next playlist on the iPod.
k RETURN button
Exits the menu or returns to the previous menu.
l Play [1] button
Starts playback. If the component is off, it will turn
on automatically.
g
h
m Next [6] button
Selects the next song.
i
n Fast Forward [4] button
Press and hold to fast forward.
o Stop [2] button
j
Stops playback and displays a menu.
a
p RANDOM button
Used with the shuffle function.
k
l
m
*1
Standard mode
b
Nothing is displayed on your TV and you navigate and
select your contents by using your iPod’s display.
Only this mode can playback the video.
c
d
n
o
Extended mode
Playlists (artists, albums, songs, and so on) are displayed
on your TV, and you can navigate and select your music
while looking at your TV.
e
p
Notes:
• In Extended mode, the playback will be continued
even if the AV receiver is turned off.
• In Extended mode, you cannot operate your iPod
directly.
• In Extended mode, it may take some time to acquire
the contents.
Notes:
• With some iPod models and generations, certain but-
tons may not work as expected.
• For detailed operation of the iPod, please refer to the
instruction manual.
• In Extended mode, video contents can not display on
your TV.
78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Universal Port Option UP-A1 Dock for iPod—Continued
Status messages
❏ PORT Reading
The AV receiver is checking the connection with the
dock.
❏ PORT Not Support
The AV receiver do not support the connected dock.
❏ PORT UP-A1
UP-A1 Dock is connected.
Notes:
• The AV receiver displays the message “UP-A1” for
several seconds after recognizing the UP-A1.
• When the status message is not displayed on the AV
receiver’s display, check the connection to your iPod.
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
This section explains how to record the selected input
source to a component with recording capability, and
how to record audio and video from different sources.
Recording Separate AV Sources
Here you can record audio and video from completely
separate sources, allowing you to overdub audio onto
your video recordings. This function takes advantage of
the fact that when an audio-only input source (i.e., TV/
TAPE, TUNER, CD or PHONO) is selected, the video
input source remains unchanged.
In the following example, audio from the CD player con-
nected to the CD IN, and video from the camcorder con-
nected to the AUX 1 INPUT VIDEO jack are recorded
by the VCR connected to the VCR/DVR OUT jacks.
Notes:
• The surround sound and DSP listening modes cannot
be recorded.
• Copy-protected DVDs cannot be recorded.
• Sources connected to a digital input cannot be
recorded. Only analog inputs can be recorded.
• DTS signals will be recorded as noise, so don’t
attempt analog recording of DTS CDs or LDs.
• While the listening mode is set to Pure Audio, no
image is provided because the power is turned off for
the video circuit. If you want to make recordings,
select other listening mode.
Camcorder
AV Recording
Audio sources can be recorded to a recorder (e.g., cas-
sette deck, CDR, MD) connected to the TV/TAPE OUT
jack. Video sources can be recorded to a video recorder
(e.g., VCR, DVD recorder) connected to the VCR/DVR
OUT jack. See pages 32 to 47 for hookup information.
video signal
audio signal
Use the input selector buttons to
select the source that you want
to record.
1
You can watch the source while record-
ing. The AV receiver’s MASTER VOL-
UME control has no effect on
recording.
On your recorder, start record-
ing.
2
CD player
VCR
On the source component, start
playback.
3
Prepare the camcorder and CD player for
playback.
If you select another input source dur-
ing recording, that input source will be
recorded.
1
Prepare the VCR for recording.
2
3
4
Press the [AUX 1] input selector button.
Press the [CD] input selector button.
This selects the CD player as the audio source, but
leaves the camcorder as the video source.
Start recording on the VCR and start play-
back on the camcorder and CD player.
The video from the camcorder and the audio from
the CD player are recorded by the VCR.
5
80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting with the Remote Controller
Selecting Listening Modes
See “About the Listening Modes” on page 89 for
detailed information about the listening modes.
• The Dolby Digital and DTS listening modes can
only be selected if your DVD player is con-
connection (coaxial, optical, or HDMI).
• The listening modes you can select depend on
the format of the input signal. To check the for-
mat, see “Displaying Source Information” on
page 68.
MOVIE/TV
MUSIC
THX
GAME
• While a pair of headphones is connected, you
can only select the Pure Audio, Mono, Direct,
DTS Surround Sensation, or Stereo listening
mode.
Selecting on the AV receiver
Remote
controller
Press the [RECEIVER] button,
and then press the LISTENING
MODE button repeatedly to
select the listening mode.
PURE AUDIO
LISTENING MODE
■ LISTENING MODE buttons
[MOVIE/TV] button
This button selects the listening modes intended for
■ [PURE AUDIO] button
This button selects the Pure Audio listening mode.
When this mode is selected, the AV receiver’s dis-
play is turned off and only video signals input
through HDMI IN can be output. Pressing this but-
ton again will select the previous listening mode.
This listening mode is not available while you are
using Zone 2 (“Not Available” will appear on the
display). If you turn Zone 2 on during the Pure
Audio listening mode, the listening mode will
change to Direct.
use with movies and TV.
[MUSIC] button
This button selects the listening modes intended for
use with music.
[GAME] button
This button selects the listening modes intended for
use with video games.
[THX] button
This button selects the THX listening modes.
■ LISTENING MODE buttons
[MOVIE/TV] button
This button selects the listening modes intended for
use with movies and TV.
[MUSIC] button
This button selects the listening modes intended for
use with music.
[GAME] button
This button selects the listening modes intended for
use with video games.
[THX] button
This button selects the THX listening modes.
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Listening Modes—Continued
The Speaker layout illustration
shows which speakers are set to
active in the “Speaker Configu-
ration” setting (see page 95).
: Front left speaker
FL
LW
LH
C
RH
RW
FR
SR
SBR
SBL
SL
: Front wide left speaker
: Front high left speaker
: Center speaker
: Front high right speaker
: Front wide right speaker
: Front right speaker
: Surround right speaker
: Surround back right speaker
: Surround back left speaker
: Surround left speaker
LH
FL
RH
LW
SL
C
FR RW
SW
SW
SR
The LISTENING MODE button
illustration shows that listening
modes can be selected.
SBL
SBR
SW : Subwoofer
: active in the speaker settings
: non-active in the speaker settings
C
C
Mono/Multiplex Sources
✔: Available Listening Modes
Speaker layout
LH
FL
RH
LH
FL
RH
LH
RH
LH
RH
*2
*1
*1
*2
LW
SL
C
FR RW
SW
LW
SL
C
FR RW
LW
FL
C
FR RW
LW
*1
FL
C
FR RW
*1
SW *2
*2 SW
SW
SW
SW
SR
SW
SW
SR
Listening Mode
Button
SR
SL
SL
SR
*2
SBL
*2
SBR
SBL
SBR
SBL
SBR
SBL
SBR
Pure Audio*5
Direct
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Stereo
Mono
*1*2
*1*2
*1*2
*1*2
*1*2
*1*2
*1*2
*1*2
*1*2
*1*2
Orchestra
Unplugged
Studio-Mix
TV Logic
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Game-RPG
Game-Action
Game-Rock
Game-Sports
All Ch Stereo
Full Mono
✔
✔
Dimensional)
DTS Surround
Sensation
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Notes:
*1 For 7ch output, output can be switched between Front high or Front wide speakers by pressing the [SP LAYOUT] button (depending on the
“Speaker Configuration” setting (see page 95)).
*2 For 9ch output, output can be switched between the combination of Surround back and Front high, or Surround back and Front wide
speakers by pressing the [SP LAYOUT] button.
*5 This listening mode is not available while you are using Zone 2 (“Not Available” will appear on the display). If you turn Zone 2 on during
the Pure Audio listening mode, the listening mode will change to Direct.
• Available sampling rate for PCM input signal is 32/44.1/48/88.2/96/176.4/192kHz.
• The listening modes cannot be selected with some source formats.
82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Listening Modes—Continued
Stereo Source (1/2)
✔: Available Listening Modes
Speaker layout
LH
FL
RH
LH
FL
RH
LH
RH
LH
RH
*1 *2
*1
*2
LW
SL
C
FR RW
LW
SL
C
FR RW
LW
FL
C
FR RW
LW
*1
FL
C
FR RW
*1
*2 SW
SW *2
SW
SW
SR
SW
SW
SR
SW
SW
SR
Listening Mode
Button
SL
SL
SR
*2
SBL
*2
SBR
SBL
SBR
SBL
SBR
SBL
SBR
Pure Audio*5
Direct
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Stereo
Mono
PLII/PLIIx
Movie*3
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
PLII/PLIIx
Music*3
PLII/PLIIx
Game*3
PLIIz Height
Neo:6 Cinema
Neo:6 Music
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Neural
Surround
Neural Digital
Music
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
PLII/PLIIx
Movie*3
✔
✔
✔
THX Cinema
PLII/PLIIx Movie
Audyssey DSX*4
PLllz Height
THX Cinema
Neo:6 Cinema
THX Cinema
Neo:6 Cinema
Audyssey DSX*4
Neural THX
Cinema
*2
✔
✔
✔
*2
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
PLII/PLIIx
Music*3
THX Music
PLII/PLIIx Music
Audyssey DSX*4
PLllz Height
THX Music
Neo:6 Music
THX Music
Neo:6 Music
Audyssey DSX*4
Neural Digital
Music
*2
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
*2
✔
✔
THX Music
83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Listening Modes—Continued
Stereo Source (2/2)
✔: Available Listening Modes
Speaker layout
LH
FL
RH
LH
FL
RH
LH
RH
LH
RH
*1 *2
*1
*2
LW
SL
C
FR RW
LW
SL
C
FR RW
LW
FL
C
FR RW
LW
*1
FL
C
FR RW
*1
*2 SW
SW *2
SW
SW
SR
SW
SW
SR
SW
SW
SR
Listening Mode
Button
SL
SL
SR
*2
SBL
*2
SBR
SBL
SBR
SBL
SBR
SBL
SBR
PLII/PLIIx
Game*3
✔
✔
✔
THX Games
PLII/PLIIx Game
Audyssey DSX*4
PLllz Height
THX Games
Neural THX
Games
PLII Game THX
Ultra2 Games
PLIIzHeightTHX
Ultra2 Games
*2
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
*1*2
*1*2
*1*2
*1*2
*1*2
*1*2
*1*2
*1*2
*1*2
*1*2
Orchestra
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Unplugged
Studio-Mix
TV Logic
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Game-RPG
Game-Action
Game-Rock
Game-Sports
All Ch Stereo
Full Mono
✔
✔
T-D (Theater-
Dimensional)
Neo:6 Cinema
DTS Surround
Sensation
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Neo:6 Music
DTS Surround
Sensation
✔
✔
✔
✔
Notes:
*1 For 7ch output, output can be switched between Front high or Front wide speakers by pressing the [SP LAYOUT] button (depending on the
“Speaker Configuration” setting (see page 95)).
*2 For 9ch output, output can be switched between the combination of Surround back and Front high, or Surround back and Front wide
*3 If there are no surround back speakers, or Powered Zone 3 is being used, Dolby Pro Logic II is used.
*4 • This listening mode can be selected only when all the following conditions are satisfied:
a. Center speaker is connected to the AV receiver.
b. Either of Front High speakers or Front Wide speakers is connected to the AV receiver.
• Output can be switched between Front high or Front wide speakers by pressing the [SP LAYOUT] button (depending on the “Speaker
Configuration” setting (see page 95)).
*5 This listening mode is not available while you are using Zone 2 (“Not Available” will appear on the display). If you turn Zone 2 on during
the Pure Audio listening mode, the listening mode will change to Direct.
• Available sampling rate for PCM input signal is 32/44.1/48/88.2/96/176.4/192kHz.
• The listening modes cannot be selected with some source formats.
84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Listening Modes—Continued
5.1 channel Sources (1/3)
✔: Available Listening Modes
Speaker layout
LH
FL
RH
LH
FL
RH
LH
RH
LH
RH
*1 *2
*1
*2
LW
SL
C
FR RW
LW
SL
C
FR RW
LW
FL
C
FR RW
LW
*1
FL
C
FR RW
*1
*2 SW
SW *2
SW
SW
SR
SW
SW
SR
SW
SW
SR
Listening Mode
Button
SL
SL
SR
*2
SBL
*2
SBR
SBL
SBR
SBL
SBR
SBL
SBR
Pure Audio*5
Direct
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Stereo
Mono
DolbyDigital/
DolbyDigital
Plus/TrueHD/
Multichannel/
DTS/
DTS 96/24*6/
DTS Express/
DTS-HD High
Resolution
✔
✔
✔
Audio/DTS-HD
Master Audio/
DSD*3
PLIIx Movie
PLIIx Music
PLIIz Height
✔
✔
✔
✔
DolbyEX
DolbyEX
Audyssey DSX
*2
✔
Neo:6
✔
Neo:6Audyssey
DSX
*2
✔
Neural
Surround
✔
Audyssey DSX*4
✔
✔
THX Cinema
✔
PLIIx Movie
THX Cinema
PLIIx Movie
Audyssey DSX
PLIIz Height
THX Cinema
Neo:6
THX Cinema
Neural THX
Cinema
✔
*2
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
THX Music
✔
85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Listening Modes—Continued
5.1 channel Sources (2/3)
✔: Available Listening Modes
Speaker layout
LH
FL
RH
LH
FL
RH
LH
RH
LH
RH
*1 *2
*1
*2
LW
SL
C
FR RW
LW
SL
C
FR RW
LW
FL
C
FR RW
LW
*1
FL
C
FR RW
*1
*2 SW
SW *2
SW
SW
SR
SW
SW
SR
SW
SW
SR
Listening Mode
Button
SL
SL
SR
*2
SBL
*2
SBR
SBL
SBR
SBL
SBR
SBL
SBR
PLIIx Music
THX Music
PLIIx Music
Audyssey DSX
PLIIz Height
THX Music
Neo:6 THX
Music
✔
*2
✔
✔
✔
Neural THX
Music
✔
✔
✔
THX Games
✔
PLIIx Height
THX Games
Neo:6 THX
Games
Neural THX
Games
THX Surround
EX
THX Ultra2
Cinema
PLIIz THX Ultra2
Cinema
THX Ultra2
Music
PLIIz THX Ultra2
Music
THX Ultra2
Games
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
PLIIz THX Ultra2
Games
*1*2
*1*2
*1*2
*1*2
*1*2
*1*2
*1*2
*1*2
*1*2
*1*2
Orchestra
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Unplugged
Studio-Mix
TV Logic
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Game-RPG
Game-Action
Game-Rock
Game-Sports
All Ch Stereo
Full Mono
✔
✔
86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Listening Modes—Continued
5.1 channel Sources (3/3)
✔: Available Listening Modes
Speaker layout
LH
FL
RH
LH
FL
RH
LH
RH
LH
RH
*1 *2
*1
*2
LW
SL
C
FR RW
LW
SL
C
FR RW
LW
FL
C
FR RW
LW
*1
FL
C
FR RW
*1
*2 SW
SW *2
SW
SW
SR
SW
SW
SR
SW
SW
SR
Listening Mode
Button
SL
SL
SR
*2
SBL
*2
SBR
SBL
SBR
SBL
SBR
SBL
SBR
T-D (Theater-
Dimensional)
DTS Surround
Sensation
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Notes:
*1 For 7ch output, output can be switched between Front high or Front wide speakers by pressing the [SP LAYOUT] button (depending on the
“Speaker Configuration” setting (see page 95)).
*2 For 9ch output, output can be switched between the combination of Surround back and Front high, or Surround back and Front wide
speakers by pressing the [SP LAYOUT] button.
*3 AV receiver can input the DSD signal from HDMI IN. Setting the output setting on the player side to PCM might obtain a better sound
according to the player. In that case, set the output setting on the player side to PCM.
*4 • This listening mode can be selected only when all the following conditions are satisfied:
a. Center speaker is connected to the AV receiver.
b. Either of Front High speakers or Front Wide speakers is connected to the AV receiver.
• Output can be switched between Front high or Front wide speakers by pressing the [SP LAYOUT] button (depending on the “Speaker
Configuration” setting (see page 95)).
*5 This listening mode is not available while you are using Zone 2 (“Not Available” will appear on the display). If you turn Zone 2 on during
the Pure Audio listening mode, the listening mode will change to Direct.
*6 Depending on the input source, DTS is used.
• Available sampling rate for PCM input signal is 32/44.1/48/88.2/96/176.4/192kHz.
• The listening modes cannot be selected with some source formats.
87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Listening Modes—Continued
7.1 channel Sources
✔: Available Listening Modes
Speaker layout
LH
FL
RH
LH
FL
RH
LH
RH
LH
RH
*1 *2
*1
*2
LW
SL
C
FR RW
LW
SL
C
FR RW
LW
FL
C
FR RW
LW
*1
FL
C
FR RW
*1
*2 SW
SW *2
SW
SW
SR
SW
SW
SR
SW
SW
SR
Listening Mode
Button
SL
SL
SR
*2
SBL
*2
SBR
SBL
SBR
SBL
SBR
SBL
SBR
Pure Audio*5
Direct
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Stereo
Mono
Multichannel/
DolbyDigital
Plus/TrueHD/
DTS-HD High
Resolution
*3
✔
✔
✔
Audio/DTS-HD
Master Audio/
DTS-ES
Discrete*6/
DTS-ES Matrix*6
PLIIz Height
✔
*2
AudysseyDSX*4
THX Cinema
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
PLIIz Height
THX Cinema
THX Music
PLIIz Height
THX Music
THX Games
PLIIz Height
THX Games
*1*2
*1*2
*1*2
*1*2
*1*2
*1*2
*1*2
*1*2
*1*2
*1*2
Orchestra
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Unplugged
Studio-Mix
TV Logic
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Game-RPG
Game-Action
Game-Rock
Game-Sports
All Ch Stereo
Full Mono
✔
✔
T-D (Theater-
Dimensional)
DTS Surround
Sensation
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Listening Modes—Continued
Notes:
*1 For 7ch output, output can be switched between Front high or Front wide speakers by pressing the [SP LAYOUT] button (depending on the
“Speaker Configuration” setting (see page 95)).
*2 For 9ch output, output can be switched between the combination of Surround back and Front high, or Surround back and Front wide
*3 Based on the audio channels contained in the source, the corresponding speakers will output the sound.
*4 • This listening mode can be selected only when all the following conditions are satisfied:
a. Center speaker is connected to the AV receiver.
b. Either of Front High speakers or Front Wide speakers is connected to the AV receiver.
• Output can be switched between Front high or Front wide speakers by pressing the [SP LAYOUT] button (depending on the “Speaker
Configuration” setting (see page 95)).
*5 This listening mode is not available while you are using Zone 2 (“Not Available” will appear on the display). If you turn Zone 2 on during
the Pure Audio listening mode, the listening mode will change to Direct.
*6 If there are no surround back speakers, DTS is used.
• Available sampling rate for PCM input signal is 32/44.1/48/88.2/96/176.4/192kHz.
• The listening modes cannot be selected with some source formats.
•
Dolby PLIIx Music
About the Listening Modes
Use this mode with any stereo or Dolby Surround
(Pro Logic) music source (e.g., CD, radio, cassette,
TV, VHS, DVD).
The AV receiver’s listening modes can transform your
listening room into a movie theater or concert hall, with
high fidelity and stunning surround sound.
•
Dolby PLIIx Game
Pure Audio
Use this mode with video games, especially those
In this mode, the display and video circuitry are turned
off, minimizing possible noise sources for the ultimate in
high-fidelity reproduction. (As the video circuitry is
turned off, only video signals input through HDMI IN
can be output.)
that bear the Dolby Pro Logic II logo.
Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height
Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height is designed to more effec-
tively use existing program material when height chan-
nel speaker outputs are present. Dolby Pro Logic IIz
Height can be used to upmix a variety of sources from
movies and music, but are particularly well-suited to
upmix game content.
Direct
In this mode, audio from the input source is output
directly with minimal processing, providing high-fidel-
ity reproduction. All of the source’s audio channels are
output as they are.
Dolby Digital
Use this mode with DVDs that bear the Dolby Digital
logo, and Dolby Digital TV broadcasts. This is the most
common digital surround-sound format, and it’ll put you
right in the middle of the action, just like being in a
movie theater or concert hall.
Stereo
Sound is output by the front left and right speakers and
subwoofer.
Mono
Use this mode when watching an old movie with a mono
soundtrack, or use it with the foreign language
soundtracks recorded in the left and right channels of
some movies. It can also be used with DVDs or other
sources containing multiplexed audio, such as karaoke
DVDs.
Audyssey Dynamic Surround Expansion™
Audyssey Dynamic Surround Expansion™ is a scalable
system that adds new speakers to improve surround
impression. Starting with a 5.1 system Dynamic Sur-
round Expansion first adds Wide channels for the biggest
impact on envelopment. Research in human hearing has
proven that information from the Wide channels is much
more critical in the presentation of a realistic soundstage
than then Back Surround channels found in traditional
7.1 systems. Dynamic Surround Expansion then creates
a pair of Height channels to reproduce the next most
important acoustical and perceptual cues. In addition to
these new Wide and Height channels, Dynamic Sur-
round Expansion applies Surround Envelopment Pro-
cessing to enhance the blend between the front and
surround channels.
Multichannel
This mode is for use with PCM multichannel sources.
Dolby Pro Logic IIx
Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Pro Logic IIx expands any 2-channel source for
7.1-channel playback. It provides a very natural and
seamless surround-sound experience that fully envelops
the listener. As well as music and movies, video games
can also benefit from the dramatic spatial effects and
vivid imaging. If you’re not using any surround back
speakers, Dolby Pro Logic II will be used instead of
Dolby Pro Logic IIx.
•
Dolby PLIIx Movie
Use this mode with any stereo or Dolby Surround
(Pro Logic) movie (e.g., TV, DVD, VHS).
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Listening Modes—Continued
5.1-channel source + Dolby EX
DTS Neo:6
These modes expand 5.1-channel sources for 6.1/7.1-
channel playback. They’re especially suited to Dolby EX
soundtracks that include a matrix-encoded surround
back channel. The additional channel adds an extra
dimension and provides an enveloping surround sound
experience, perfect for rotating and fly-by sound effects.
This mode expands any 2-channel source for up to 7.1-
channel playback. It uses seven full-bandwidth channels
of matrix decoding for matrix-encoded material, provid-
ing a very natural and seamless surround sound experi-
ence that fully envelops the listener.
•
Neo:6 Cinema
Dolby Digital Plus
Use this mode with any stereo movie (e.g., TV,
Developed for use with HDTV, including the new video
disc formats Blu-ray and HD DVD, this is the latest mul-
tichannel audio format from Dolby. It supports up to 7.1
channels with 48 kHz sampling rate.
DVD, VHS).
•
Neo:6 Music
Use this mode with any stereo music source (e.g.,
CD, radio, cassette, TV, VHS, DVD).
Dolby TrueHD
5.1-channel source + Neo:6
Designed to take full advantage of the additional storage
space offered by the new Blu-ray and HD DVD disc for-
mats, this new Dolby format offers up to 7.1 discrete
channels of digital audio with 48/96 kHz, up to 5.1-chan-
nels with 192 kHz sampling rate.
This mode uses Neo:6 to expand 5.1-channel sources for
6.1/7.1-channel playback.
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
Developed for use with HDTV, including the new video
disc formats Blu-ray and HD DVD, this is the latest mul-
tichannel audio format from DTS. It supports up to 7.1
channels with 96 kHz sampling rate.
5.1-channel source + Dolby PLIIx Music
These modes use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music mode
to expand 5.1-channel sources for 6.1/7.1-channel play-
back.
DTS-HD Master Audio
Designed to take full advantage of the additional storage
space offered by the new Blu-ray and HD DVD disc for-
mats, this new DTS format offers up to 7.1 discrete chan-
nels of digital audio with 48/96 kHz, up to 5.1-channels
with 192 kHz sampling rate.
5.1-channel source + Dolby PLIIx Movie
These modes use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie mode
to expand 5.1-channel sources for 7.1-channel playback.
DTS
The DTS digital surround-sound format supports up to
5.1 discrete channels and uses less compression for high-
fidelity reproduction. Use it with DVDs and CDs that
bear the DTS logo.
DTS Express
This format supports up to 5.1 channels and a lower sam-
pling rate of 48 kHz. Applications include interactive
audio and commentary encoding for HD DVD Sub
Audio and Blu-ray Secondary Audio. Also broadcast
and media servers.
DTS 96/24
This mode is for use with DTS 96/24 sources. This is
high-resolution DTS with a 96 kHz sampling rate and
24-bit resolution, providing superior fidelity. Use it with
DVDs that bear the DTS 96/24 logo.
Neural Digital Music
Neural Digital Music is a new surround mode specifi-
cally designed to enhance the playback of compressed
digital music content. It provides listeners with an
expanded sound stage and clean surround experience,
even with compressed audio sources such as MP3s and
Internet streams.
DTS-ES Discrete
This mode is for use with DTS-ES Discrete soundtracks,
which use a discrete surround back channel for true 6.1/
7.1-channel playback. The seven totally separate audio
channels provide better spatial imaging and 360-degree
sound localization, perfect for sounds that pan across the
surround channels. Use it with DVDs that bear the DTS-
ES logo, especially those with a DTS-ES Discrete
soundtrack.
DSD
DSD stands for Direct Stream Digital and is the format
used to store digital audio on Super Audio CDs (SACD).
This mode can be used with Super Audio CDs that fea-
ture multichannel audio.
DTS-ES Matrix
DTS Surround Sensation Speaker
With this mode you can enjoy a virtual 5.1 surround
sound even with only two speakers.
This mode is for use with DTS-ES Matrix soundtracks,
which use a matrix-encoded back-channel for 6.1/7.1-
channel playback. Use it with DVDs that bear the DTS-
ES logo, especially those with a DTS-ES Matrix
soundtrack.
•
•
Neo:6 Cinema + DTS Surround Sensation
Neo:6 Music + DTS Surround Sensation
These modes use Neo:6 to expand stereo sources for vir-
tual surround playback.
DTS Surround Sensation Headphone
DTS Surround Sensation Headphone delivers simulated
virtual multi-channel surround sound through any stereo
headphones.
90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Listening Modes—Continued
THX
stereo sources, including video games. Neural Surround
can also be used by broadcasters to encode and transmit
surround-sound content over a stereo signal, which lis-
teners can enjoy as either surround sound or normal ste-
reo.
Founded by George Lucas, THX develops stringent stan-
dards that ensure movies are reproduced in movie the-
aters and home theaters just as the director intended.
THX Modes carefully optimize the tonal and spatial
characteristics of the soundtrack for reproduction in the
home-theater environment. They can be used with 2-
channel matrixed and multichannel sources.
Surround back speaker output depends on the source
material and the selected listening mode.
Onkyo Original DSP Modes
Orchestra
Suitable for classical or operatic music, this mode
emphasizes the surround channels in order to widen the
stereo image, and simulates the natural reverberation of
a large hall.
•
•
•
•
THX Cinema
THX Cinema mode corrects theatrical soundtracks
for playback in a home theater environment. In this
mode, THX Loudness Plus is configured for cinema
levels and Re-EQ, Timbre Matching, and Adaptive
Decorrelation are active.
Unplugged
Suitable for acoustic instruments, vocals, and jazz, this
mode emphasizes the front stereo image, giving the
impression of being right in front of the stage.
THX Music
Studio-Mix
THX Music mode is tailored for listening to music,
which is typically mastered at significantly higher
levels than movies. In this mode, THX Loudness
Plus is configured for music playback and only Tim-
bre Matching is active.
Suitable for rock or pop music, listening to music in this
mode creates a lively sound field with a powerful acous-
tic image, like being at a club or rock concert.
TV Logic
This mode adds realistic acoustics to TV shows pro-
duced in a TV studio, surround effects to the entire
sound, and clarity to voices.
THX Games
THX Games mode is meant for spatially accurate
playback of game audio, which is often mixed simi-
larly to movies but in a smaller environment. THX
Loudness Plus is configured for game audio levels,
with Timbre Matching active.
Game-RPG
Use this mode when playing role playing game discs.
Game-Action
Use this mode when playing action game discs.
THX Ultra2 Cinema
This mode expands 5.1-channel sources for 7.1-
channel playback. It does this by analyzing the com-
position of the surround source, optimizing the
ambient and directional sounds to produce the sur-
round back channel output.
Game-Rock
Use this mode when playing rock game discs.
Game-Sports
Use this mode when playing sports game discs.
All Ch Stereo
•
•
THX Ultra2 Music
This mode is designed for use with music. It expands
5.1-channel sources for 7.1-channel playback.
Ideal for background music, this mode fills the entire lis-
tening area with stereo sound from the front, surround,
and surround back speakers.
THX Ultra2 Games
Full Mono
This mode is designed for use with video games. It
can expand 5.1-channel sources for 6.1/7.1-channel
playback.
In this mode, all speakers output the same sound in
mono, so the sound you hear is the same regardless of
where you are within the listening room.
•
THX Surround EX
T-D (Theater-Dimensional)
This mode expands 5.1-channel sources for 6.1/7.1-
channel playback. It’s especially suited to Dolby
Digital EX sources. THX Surround EX, also known
as Dolby Digital Surround EX, is a joint develop-
ment between Dolby Laboratories and THX Ltd.
With this mode you can enjoy a virtual surround sound
even with only two or three speakers. This works by con-
trolling how sounds reach the listener’s left and right
ears. Good results may not be possible if there’s too
much reverb, so we recommend that you use this mode
in an environment with little or no natural reverb.
Neural Surround
Neural Surround employs psychoacoustic frequency
domain processing, which allows delivery of a more
detailed sound stage, with superior channel separation
and localization of audio elements. The Neural Surround
modes can expand any 2-channel stereo source for 5.1-
or 7.1-channel playback, respectively. Use them with
CD, radio, cassette, TV, VHS, DVD, and other 2-channel
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup
Onscreen Setup Menus
The onscreen setup menus appear on the connected TV and provide a convenient way to change the AV receiver’s
various settings. Settings are organized into nine categories on the main menu, most containing a submenu.
Main menu
Submenus
pages 93–94
Menu
1. Monitor Out
1. Input/Output Assign
2. Speaker Setup
2. HDMI Input
3. Component Video Input
4. Digital Audio Input
5. Analog Audio Input
3. Audio Adjust
4. Source Setup
5. Listening Mode Preset
6. Miscellaneous
7. Hardware Setup
8. Remote Controller Setup
9. Lock Setup
page 57 page 56 page 55 page 54
page 52
pages 95–99
2. Speaker Setup
1. Speaker Settings
2. Speaker Configuration
3. Speaker Distance
4. Level Calibration
5. Equalizer Settings
6. THX Audio Setup
pages 110–111
1. Volume Setup
2. OSD Setup
page 57
pages 100–103
3. Audio Adjust
pages 111–115
1. Multiplex/Mono
2. Dolby
3. DTS
7. Hardware Setup
4. Audyssey
5. Theater-Dimensional
6. LFE Level
7. Direct
1. Remote ID
2. Multi Zone
3. Tuner
4. HDMI
5. Network
6. Firmware Update
page 135
pages 104–108
4. Source Setup
DVD/BD
page 126 page 59
1. IntelliVolume
2. A/V Sync
3. Name Edit
4. Picture Adjust
8. Remote Controller Setup
1. Remote Mode Setup
2. Activities Setup
page 109
5. Listening Mode Preset
1. DVD/BD
page 150
page 139
2. VCR/DVR
3. CBL/SAT
4. GAME
page 116
9. Lock Setup
Lock
5. AUX1
Unlocked
92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup—Continued
Input/Output Assign
This section explains items on the “Input/Output Assign” menu.
Press the [RECEIVER] button followed by
the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make sure the
appropriate external input is selected on your TV.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to
select setting, and then use the Left and
Right [e]/[r] buttons to set them.
1
4
When you’ve finished, press the [SETUP]
button.
5
The setup menu closes.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to
select “1. Input/Output Assign”, and then
press [ENTER].
2
3
Note:
This procedure can also be performed on the AV receiver
by using its [SETUP] button, arrow buttons, and
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to
select the submenu, and then press
[ENTER].
Monitor Out
Monitor Out
See “Monitor Out Setup” on page 52.
Resolution
Brightness
–50 to +50 (default: 0)
With this setting you can adjust the picture brightness. “–50” is the darkest. “+50” is the brightest.
Contrast –50 to +50 (default: 0)
With this setting you can adjust contrast. “–50” is the least. “+50” is the greatest.
Hue –20 to +20 (default: 0)
With this setting you can adjust the red/green balance. “–20” is the strongest green. “+20” is the strongest red.
Saturation –50 to +50 (default: 0)
With this setting you can adjust saturation. “–50” is the weakest color. “+50” is the strongest color.
Red Brightness –50 to +50 (default: 0)
With this setting you can adjust the picture red brightness. “–50” is the darkest. “+50” is the brightest.
Red Contrast –50 to +50 (default: 0)
With this setting you can adjust red contrast. “–50” is the least. “+50” is the greatest.
Green Brightness –50 to +50 (default: 0)
With this setting you can adjust the picture green brightness. “–50” is the darkest. “+50” is the brightest.
Green Contrast –50 to +50 (default: 0)
With this setting you can adjust green contrast. “–50” is the least. “+50” is the greatest.
Blue Brightness –50 to +50 (default: 0)
With this setting you can adjust the picture blue brightness. “–50” is the darkest. “+50” is the brightest.
With this setting you can adjust blue contrast. “–50” is the least. “+50” is the greatest.
HDMI Input
See “HDMI Input Setup” on page 54.
93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Component Video Input
See “Component Video Input Setup” on page 55.
Digital Audio Input
See “Digital Audio Input Setup” on page 56.
Analog Audio Input
Multich
See “Analog Audio Input Setup” on page 57.
Subwoofer Input Sensitivity
0 dB (default), 5 dB, 10 dB, 15 dB
Some DVD players output the LFE channel from their analog subwoofer output at 15 dB higher than normal.
With this setting, you can change the AV receiver’s subwoofer sensitivity to match your DVD player. Note that
this setting only affects signals connected to the AV receiver’s MULTI CH: SUBWOOFER jack.
If you find that your subwoofer is too loud, try the 10 dB or 15 dB setting.
94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speaker Setup
®
Some of the settings in this section are set automatically by Audyssey MultEQ XT Room Correction and Speaker
Setup (see page 61). For Speakers B, you need to change the settings manually.
®
Here you can check the settings made by Audyssey MultEQ XT Room Correction and Speaker Setup, or set them
®
manually, which is useful if you change one of the connected speakers after using Audyssey MultEQ XT Room Cor-
rection and Speaker Setup.
Note:
The Speaker Setup cannot be carried out while headphones are connected to the AV receiver.
Press the [RECEIVER] button, and then
use the remote controller’s [SP LAYOUT]
button to select Speakers A or
Speakers B.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to
select the submenu, and then press
[ENTER].
1
4
5
6
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to
select setting, and then use the Left and
Right [e]/[r] buttons to set them.
Note:
Speakers B cannot be selected if “Speakers
Type(FrontB)” is set to “Not Use”.
When you’ve finished, press the [SETUP]
button.
Press the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make sure the
appropriate external input is selected on your TV.
2
3
The setup menu closes.
[ENTER].
Speaker Settings
See “Speaker Settings” on page 57.
Speaker Configuration
With these settings, you can specify which speakers are connected and a crossover frequency for each speaker. You
can set the crossover frequencies, distances, and levels of the front Speakers A and front Speakers B independently.
The other speakers (i.e., subwoofer, center, surround, and surround back) use the same crossover frequencies, dis-
tances, and levels for Speakers A and Speakers B. The following crossover frequencies can be specified: “Full Band”,
“40Hz”, “50Hz”, “60Hz”, “70Hz”, “80Hz(THX)”, “90Hz”, “100Hz”, “120Hz”, “150Hz”, or “200Hz”. Specify “Full
Band” for speakers that can output low frequency bass sounds adequately, for example, speakers with a good sized
woofer. For smaller speakers, specify a crossover frequency. Sounds below the crossover frequency will be output by
the subwoofer instead of the speaker. Refer to your speaker’s manuals to determine the optimum crossover frequen-
cies.
®
If you set up your speakers using Audyssey MultEQ XT Room Correction and Speaker Setup, please make sure
manually that any THX speakers are set to “80Hz(THX)” crossover.
Subwoofer
1ch: Audio signal is outputted from SW1 jack only.
2ch: Audio signal is outputted from SW1 and SW2 jacks (default).
No: Select if no subwoofer is connected.
*1
Full Band, 40Hz, 50Hz, 60Hz, 70Hz, 80Hz(THX) (default), 90Hz, 100Hz, 120Hz,
150Hz, 200Hz
Front
*2
Full Band, 40Hz, 50Hz, 60Hz, 70Hz, 80Hz(THX), 90Hz, 100Hz, 120Hz, 150Hz,
200Hz
None: Select if no speaker is connected.
Center
*2
Surround
*2*3*5*7
Front Wide
*2*3*7*10
Front High
*3*4*6
Surr Back
95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup—Continued
*8
1ch: Select if only one surround back L speaker is connected.
2ch: Select if two (left and right) surround back speakers are connected (default).
Surr Back Ch
LPF of LFE (Low-Pass Filter for the LFE Channel)
80Hz(THX) (default), 90Hz, 100Hz, 120Hz
®
This setting is not set automatically by Audyssey MultEQ XT Room Correction and Speaker Setup (see
page 61).
With this setting, you can specify the cutoff frequency of the LFE channel’s low-pass filter (LPF), which can
be used to filter out unwanted hum. The LPF only applies to sources that use the LFE channel.
*
*9
On: Double Bass function on (default).
Off(THX): Double Bass function off.
DoubleBass
®
This setting is not set automatically by Audyssey MultEQ XT Room Correction and Speaker Setup (see
page 61).
With the Double Bass function, you can boost bass output by feeding bass sounds from the front left and right,
center channels to the subwoofer.
*
If you’re using THX-certified speakers, select “Off(THX)”.
Notes:
*1 If the “Subwoofer” setting is set to “No”, the “Front” setting is fixed at “Full Band”.
*2 If the “Front” setting is set to anything other than “Full Band”, “Full Band” cannot be selected here.
*3 If the “Surround” setting is set to “None”, this setting cannot be selected.
*4 If the “Surround” setting is set to anything other than “Full Band”, “Full Band” cannot be selected here.
*5 If the “Powered Zone2” setting is set to “Act” (page 134), this setting cannot be selected.
*6 If the “Powered Zone3” setting is set to “Act” (page 134), or “Speakers Type(FrontA)” setting is set to “Bi-Amp” or “BTL”
(page 58), this setting cannot be selected.
*7 If the “Speakers Type(FrontB)” setting is set to “Normal”, “Bi-Amp” or “BTL” (page 57), this setting cannot be selected.
*8 If the “Surr Back” setting is set to “None”, this setting cannot be selected.
*9 This function can be set only if the “Subwoofer” setting is set to “1ch” or “2ch”, and the “Front” setting is set to “Full Band”.
*10 If the Powered Zone 2 is being used (page 134), this setting cannot be selected.
Subwoofer, Front, Center, Surround, Surr Back
(Setting Speakers A and Speakers B)
Not Use: Select if you don’t want to use each speaker with Speakers A or Speakers B.
Use: Select if you do want to use each speaker with Speakers A or Speakers B.
If you’re using Speakers B, you can choose whether or not to use the subwoofer, center, surround, and surround
back speakers with the Speakers A and Speakers B configurations independently. You cannot choose whether
or not to use the front speakers.
Notes:
• These settings can only be displayed when the “Speakers Type(FrontB)” setting is set to other than “Not Use”
(page 57).
• You cannot select speakers that you set to “No” or “None”.
96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup—Continued
Speaker Distance
®
This setting is set automatically by Audyssey MultEQ XT Room Correction and Speaker Setup (see page 61).
Here you can specify the distance from each speaker to the listening position so that the sound from each speaker
arrives at the listener’s ears as the sound designer intended.
You can set the distances for front Speakers A and front Speakers B independently. The other speakers (i.e., sub-
woofer, center, surround, and surround back) use the same distance settings for Speakers A and Speakers B.
Unit
feet: Distances can be set in feet. Range: 0.5 to 30 feet in 0.5-foot steps.
(North American models: default)
meters: Distances can be set in meters. Range: 0.15 to 9 meters in 0.15-meter steps.
(European and Asian models: default)
Left, Front Wide Left, Front High Left, Center, Front High Right, Front Wide Right, Right, Surr Right,
*1
Surr Back Right, Surr Back Left, Surr Left, Subwoofer 1, Subwoofer 2
Specify the distance from the each speaker to your listening position.
Notes:
• You cannot select speakers that you set to “No” or “None” in the “Speaker Configuration” (page 95).
*1 If the “Subwoofer” setting is set to “1ch”, this setting cannot be selected.
Level Calibration
®
Level Calibration can be set automatically by Audyssey MultEQ XT Room Correction and Speaker Setup (see
page 61).
If you prefer, you can adjust the level of each speaker with the built-in test tone so that the volume of each speaker is
the same at the listening position. You can adjust the levels of front Speakers A and front Speakers B independently.
The other speakers (i.e., subwoofer, center, surround, and surround back) use the same level settings for Speakers A
and Speakers B.
Left, Front Wide Left, Front High Left, Center, Front High Right, Front Wide Right, Right, Surr Right,
*1
Surr Back Right, Surr Back Left, Surr Left, Subwoofer 1, Subwoofer 2
The levels can be adjusted from –12.0 to +12.0 dB in 0.5 dB steps (–15.0 to +12.0 dB for the subwoofer).
Notes:
• The speakers cannot be calibrated while the output of the AV receiver is muted.
• The test tone is output at the standard level for THX, which is 0 dB (absolute volume setting 82). If you
normally listen at volume settings below this, be careful because the test tone will be much louder.
• You cannot get the test tone from speakers that you set to “No” or “None” in the “Speaker Configuration”
(page 95).
• Speakers B cannot be selected if “Speakers Type(FrontB)” is set to “Not Use”.
*1 If the “Subwoofer” setting is set to “1ch”, this setting cannot be selected.
Tip:
If you’re using a handheld sound level meter, adjust the level of each speaker so that it reads 75 dB SPL at the listening
position, measured with C-weighting and slow reading.
97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup—Continued
Equalizer Settings
®
This setting is set automatically by Audyssey MultEQ XT Room Correction and Speaker Setup (see page 61).
With the Equalizer settings, you can adjust the tone of speakers individually with a 7-band equalizer. The volume of
each speaker can be set on this page. The Equalizer settings only apply to Speakers A and cannot be adjusted while
Speakers B is selected.
Notes:
• You can select: “63Hz”, “160Hz”, “400Hz”, “1000Hz”, “2500Hz”, “6300Hz”, or “16000Hz”. And for the sub-
woofer, “25Hz”, “40Hz”, “63Hz”, “100Hz”, or “160Hz”.
• While the Direct or Pure Audio listening mode is selected, the equalizer settings have no effect.
Equalizer
Manual: You can adjust the equalizer for each speaker manually. If you selected “Manual”,
continue with this procedure.
Press the Down [w] button to select “Channel”, and then use the
1
Left and Right [e]/[r] buttons to select a speaker.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to select a frequency, and
2
then use the Left and Right [e]/[r] buttons to adjust the level at
that frequency.
The volume at each frequency can be adjusted from –6 to +6 dB in 1 dB
steps.
Tip:
Low frequencies (e.g., 63Hz) affect bass sounds; high frequencies (e.g.,
16000Hz) affect treble sounds.
Use the Up [q] button to select “Channel”, and then use the Left
You cannot select speakers that you set to “No” or “None” in the “Speaker
Configuration” (page 95).
3
and Right [e]/[r] buttons to select another speaker.
Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each speaker.
®
Correction and Speaker Setup. Be sure to select this setting after having performed
Room Correction and Speaker Setup. “Audyssey” is automatically selected when
“Dynamic EQ” and “Dynamic Volume” are set to “On” (see page 102). When
“Audyssey” is selected, “Dolby Volume” becomes “Off” automatically
(page 118).
Off: Tone off, response flat (default).
98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup—Continued
THX Audio Setup
®
This setting is not set automatically by Audyssey MultEQ XT Room Correction and Speaker Setup (see page 61).
With the “SurrBack Sp Spacing” setting, you can specify the distance between your surround back speakers. This
setting is used by Speakers A and Speakers B.
If you’re using a THX-certified subwoofer, set the “THX Ultra2/Select2 Subwoofer” setting to “Yes”. You can then
apply THX’s Boundary Gain Compensation (BGC) to compensate the perceived exaggeration of low frequencies for
listeners sitting very close to a room boundary (i.e., wall).
You can also set the THX Loudness Plus. When the “Loudness Plus” is set to “On”, it is possible to enjoy even subtle
nuances of audio expression at low volume.
This result is only available when the THX listening mode is selected.
SurrBack Sp Spacing
< 1ft (< 0.3m):
Select this if your surround back speakers are between 0 and 1 foot (0–30 cm) apart.
1 ft – 4 ft (0.3 m – 1.2 m):
Select this if your surround back speakers are between 1 and 4 feet (0.3–1.2 m) apart.
> 4ft (> 1.2m) (default):
Select this if your surround back speakers are more than 4 feet (1.2 m) apart.
Note:
Cannot be set if “Surr Back Ch” is set to “1ch” (page 96) or “Surr Back” is set to “None” (page 95).
THX Ultra2/Select2 Subwoofer
No: Select this if you do not have a THX-certified subwoofer.
Yes: Select this if you have a THX-certified subwoofer.
Note:
If the “Subwoofer” setting is set to “No”, this setting cannot be selected (page 95).
BGC
Off: Select this to turn off BGC.
On: Select this to turn on BGC.
Note:
This setting is only available if “THX Ultra2/Select2 Subwoofer” is set to “Yes”.
Loudness Plus
Off: Select this to turn off Loudness Plus.
On: Select this to turn on Loudness Plus (default).
Preserve THX Settings
Yes: Audyssey Dynamic EQ™ / Audyssey Dynamic Volume™ will not be active in
THX listening mode.
No: Audyssey Dynamic EQ / Audyssey Dynamic Volume will be active in THX lis-
tening mode depending on the setting.
Note:
This setting is fixed at “Yes” if “Loudness Plus” is set to “On”.
THX Loudness Plus
THX Loudness Plus is a new volume control technology featured in THX Ultra2 Plus™ and THX Select2 Plus™
Certified receivers. With THX Loudness Plus, home theater audiences can now experience the rich details in a
surround mix at any volume level. A consequence of turning the volume below Reference Level is that certain
sound elements can be lost or perceived differently by the listener. THX Loudness Plus compensates for the tonal
and spatial shifts that occur when the volume is reduced by intelligently adjusting ambient surround channel levels
and frequency response. This enables users experience the true impact of soundtracks regardless of the volume
setting. THX Loudness Plus is automatically applied when listening in any THX listening mode. The new THX
Cinema, THX Music, and THX Games modes are tailored to apply the proper THX Loudness Plus settings for
each type of content.
99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup—Continued
Audio Adjust
With the Audio Adjust functions and settings, you can adjust the sound and listening modes as you like.
Press the [RECEIVER] button followed by
the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make sure the
appropriate external input is selected on your TV.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to
select setting, and then use the Left and
Right [e]/[r] buttons to set them.
1
4
When you’ve finished, press the [SETUP]
button.
5
The setup menu closes.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to
select “3. Audio Adjust”, and then press
[ENTER].
2
3
Note:
This procedure can also be performed on the AV receiver
by using its [SETUP] button, arrow buttons, and
[ENTER] button.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to
select the submenu, and then press
[ENTER].
Multiplex/Mono
Multiplex
Input Channel
Main: The main channel is output (default).
Sub: The sub channel is output.
Main/Sub: Both the main and sub channels are output.
This setting determines which channel of a stereo multiplex source is output. Use it to select audio channels or
languages with multiplex sources, multilingual TV broadcasts, and so on.
Mono
Input Channel
Left + Right Both the left and right channels are output (default).
:
Left: Only the left channel is output.
Right: Only the right channel is output.
This setting specifies the channel to be used for playing any 2-channel digital source such as Dolby Digital, or
2-channel analog/PCM source in the Mono listening mode.
Output Speaker
Center: Mono audio is output by the center speaker (default).
Left / Right: Mono audio is output by the front left and right speakers.
This setting determines which speakers output mono audio when the Mono listening mode is selected.
Note:
If the “Center” setting is set to “None” (page 95), this setting is fixed at “Left / Right”.
Dolby
PLIIx Music (2ch Input)
These settings apply to only 2-channel stereo sources.
If you’re not using any surround back speakers, these settings apply to Dolby Pro Logic II, instead of Dolby Pro
Logic IIx.
Panorama
On: Panorama function on.
Off: Panorama function off (default).
With this setting, you can broaden the width of the front stereo image when using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx
Music listening mode.
Dimension
–3 to +3 (default: 0)
With this setting, you can move the sound field forward or backward when using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music
listening mode. Higher settings move the sound field backward. Lower settings move it forward.
If the stereo image feels too wide, or there’s too much surround sound, move the sound field forward to improve
the balance. Conversely, if the stereo image feels like it’s in mono, or there’s not enough surround sound, move
it backward.
100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup—Continued
Center Width
0 to 7 (default: 3)
With this setting, you can adjust the width of the sound from the center speaker when using the Dolby Pro Logic
IIx Music listening mode. Normally, if you’re using a center speaker, the center channel sound is output by only
the center speaker. (If you’re not using a center speaker, the center channel sound will be distributed to the front
left and right speakers to create a phantom center). This setting controls the front left, right, and center mix,
allowing you to adjust the weight of the center channel sound.
PLIIz Height Gain
Low: Low PLIIz Height Gain becomes active.
Mid: Medium PLIIz Height Gain becomes active (default).
High: High PLIIz Height Gain becomes active.
The Height Gain Control in Dolby Pro Logic IIz enables the listener to select how much gain is applied to the
front high speakers. There are three settings, “Low”, “Mid” and “High”, and the front high speakers are accen-
tuated in that order. While “Mid” is the default listening setting, the listener may adjust the Height Gain Control
to their personal preference.
Dolby EX
Auto: If the source signal contains a Dolby EX flag, the Dolby EX or THX
Surround EX listening mode is used.
Manual: You can select any available listening mode (default).
This setting determines how Dolby EX encoded signals are handled. This setting is unavailable if no surround
back speaker is connected. This setting is effective with Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby TrueHD
only.
Note:
If the “Front High” and “Front Wide” settings are set to other than “None” (page 95), this setting is fixed at
“Manual”.
Dolby Volume
Off: Dolby Volume off (default).
Low: Low Compression Mode becomes active.
Mid: Medium Compression Mode becomes active.
High: High Compression Mode becomes active. This setting affects volume the
most, causing all sounds to be of equal loudness.
Dolby Volume is an intelligent volume control system that resolves and improves audio frequency response and
volume inconsistencies in playback applications.
Notes:
• When the “Dolby Volume” is set to effective, “Equalizer” setting is set to “Off” or “Manual”, and “Dynamic
EQ” is set to “Off”.
• When the “Dolby Volume” is set to effective, the Late Night function cannot be set.
Half Mode
Off: Half Mode off.
On: Half Mode on (default).
The Half Mode parameter turns Dolby Volume Half Mode processing ON and OFF.
In OFF mode, Dolby Volume applies a bass and treble attenuation to the audio when the system gain exceeds
reference level. This enables a more perceptually flat listening experience as human ears are more sensitive to
bass and treble at higher levels. Some listeners however, prefer to have more bass and treble performance at
higher gain levels.
Notes:
• If the “Dolby Volume” setting is set to “Off”, this setting cannot be selected.
• During Half Mode ON playback, Dolby Volume does not apply a bass and treble attenuation when the system
volume exceeds reference level thereby boosting perception of high and low frequencies.
DTS
Neo:6 Music
Center Image
0 to 5 (default: 2)
The DTS Neo:6 Music listening mode creates 6-channel surround sound from 2-channel stereo sources. With
this setting, you can specify by how much the front left and right channel output is attenuated in order to create
the center channel.
Setting a value “0” in the middle is set to hear a sound. Sound is spread in left and right (the outside) so that the
set value is made big. Please adjust by liking.
101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup—Continued
Audyssey
For “Dynamic EQ”, “Reference Level” and “Dynamic Volume”, you cannot change the settings before completing
®
Audyssey MultEQ XT Room Correction and Speaker Setup. Audyssey settings cannot be adjusted while Speakers
B is selected.
Dynamic EQ
Off: Audyssey Dynamic EQ™ off (default).
On: Audyssey Dynamic EQ™ on.
With Audyssey Dynamic EQ™, you can enjoy great sound even when listening at low volume levels.
Audyssey Dynamic EQ solves the problem of deteriorating sound quality as volume is decreased by taking into
account human perception and room acoustics. It does so by selecting the correct frequency response and
surround volume levels moment-by-moment so that the content sounds the way it was created at any volume
level—not just at reference level.
Reference Level
Movies are mixed in rooms calibrated for film reference. To achieve the same reference level in a home theater
system each speaker level must be adjusted so that –30 dBFS band-limited (500 Hz to 2000 Hz) pink noise
produces 75 dB sound pressure level at the listening position. A home theater system automatically calibrated
®
by Audyssey MultEQ will play at reference level when the master volume control is set to the 0 dB position.
At that level you can hear the mix as the mixers heard it.
Audyssey Dynamic EQ™ is referenced to the standard film mix level. It makes adjustments to maintain the
reference response and surround envelopment when the volume is turned down from 0 dB. However, film
reference level is not always used in music or other non-film content. The Dynamic EQ Reference Level Offset
provides three offsets from the film level reference (5 dB, 10 dB, and 15 dB) that can be selected when the mix
level of the content is not within the standard.
Dynamic EQ Reference Level Offset
0 dB: This is the default setting and should be used when listening to movies.
5 dB: Select this setting for content that has a very wide dynamic range, such as
classical music.
10 dB: Select this setting for jazz or other music that has a wider dynamic range. This
setting should also be selected for TV content as that is usually mixed at 10 dB
below film reference.
at very high listening levels and has a compressed dynamic range.
Note:
If “Dynamic EQ” setting is set to “Off”, this setting cannot be selected.
Dynamic Volume (see page 61)
Off: Audyssey Dynamic Volume™ off (default).
Light: Light Compression Mode becomes active.
Medium: Medium Compression Mode becomes active.
Heavy: Heavy Compression Mode becomes active. This setting affects volume the
most, causing all sounds to be of equal loudness.
Notes:
®
• After Audyssey MultEQ XT Room Correction and Speaker Setup is completed, even if “Equalizer” setting
is not set to “Audyssey”, when “Dynamic EQ” setting is set to “On”, “Equalizer” settings is set to “Audys-
sey”. When “Dynamic Volume” is set to effective, “Equalizer” setting is set to “Audyssey” and “Dynamic
EQ” is set to “On”. When “Dynamic EQ” is set to “Off”, “Dynamic Volume” becomes “Off” automatically.
• “Dynamic Volume” setting cannot be set if speakers B are being used.
Soundstage
–3dB, –2dB, –1dB, Reference (default), +1dB, +2dB, +3dB
Adjusts the soundstage when using Audyssey Dynamic Surround Expansion™.
Note:
If the “Center” setting is set to “None”, or both “Front High” and “Front Wide” settings are set to “None”
(page 95), this setting cannot be selected.
102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup—Continued
Theater-Dimensional
Listening Angle
Wide: Select if the listening angle is greater than 30 degrees (default).
Narrow: Select if the listening angle is less than 30 degrees.
With this setting, you can optimize the Theater-Dimen-
sional listening mode by specifying the angle of the front
left and right speakers relative to the listening position.
Front left speaker
Front right speaker
Listening angle: 30°
LFE Level
With these settings, you can set the level of the LFE (Low Frequency Effects) channel individually for Dolby Digital,
DTS, multichannel PCM, Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio, and DSD sources.
If you find that low-frequency effects are too loud when using one of these sources, change the setting to –20 dB or
–Q dB.
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
Dolby Digital , DTS , Multich PCM , Dolby TrueHD , DTS-HD Master Audio , DSD
The level can be set to –Q dB, –20 dB, –10 dB, or 0 dB (default).
Notes:
*1 Sets the level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital Plus sources.
*2 Sets the level of the LFE channel for DTS and DTS-HD High Resolution sources.
*3 Sets the level of the LFE channel for multichannel PCM sources. (Multichannel PCM is input via HDMI.)
*4 Sets the level of the LFE channel for Dolby TrueHD sources.
*5 Sets the level of the LFE channel for DTS-HD Master Audio sources.
*6 Sets the level of the LFE channel for DSD (Super Audio CD) sources.
Direct
Analog
Subwoofer
This setting determines whether or not analog audio signals (bass signals) are output from front speakers when
the Pure Audio or Direct listening mode is selected.
Off: Analog audio signals (bass signals) are not output (default).
On: Analog audio signals (bass signals) are output.
DSD
DAC Direct
This setting determines whether or not DSD (Super Audio CD) audio signals are passed through the DSP for
A/V Sync, delay, etc., processing when the Pure Audio or Direct listening mode is selected.
Off: DSD signals are processed by the DSP (default).
On: DSD signals are not processed by the DSP.
Note:
Once you have selected “Yes”, only DAC Direct will be available for selection. “DSD Direct” will appear on
the display.
103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup—Continued
Source Setup
This section explains items on the “Source Setup” menu. Items can be set individually for each input selector.
Press the input selector buttons to select
an input source.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to
1
2
4
5
select an item, and then press [ENTER].
Press the [RECEIVER] button followed by
the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make sure the
appropriate external input is selected on your TV.
Use the Left and Right [e]/[r] buttons to
change it.
The “Source Setup” menu items are explained
below.
When you’ve finished, press the [SETUP]
button.
The setup menu closes.
6
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to
select “4. Source Setup”, and then press
[ENTER].
The “Source Setup” menu appears. The name of
the currently selected input selector is displayed.
3
Note:
This procedure can also be performed on the AV receiver
by using its input selector buttons, [SETUP] button,
arrow buttons, and [ENTER] button.
Input selector
DVD/BD
4. Source Setup
1. IntelliVolume
2. A/V Sync
3. Name Edit
4. Picture Adjust
For NET/USB input source only “IntelliVolume”
will be available.
IntelliVolume
With IntelliVolume, you can set the input level for each input selector individually. This is useful if one of your source
components is louder or quieter than the others.
If a component is noticeably louder than the others, use the Left [e] button to reduce its input level. If it’s noticeably
quieter, use the Right [r] button to increase its input level.
IntelliVolume
−12 dB to +12 dB (default: 0 dB)
A/V Sync
When using your DVD player’s progressive scanning function, you may find that the picture and sound are out of
sync. With the A/V Sync setting, you can correct this by applying a delay to the audio signal.
To view the TV picture while setting the delay, press [ENTER]. To return to the previous screen, press the [RETURN]
button.
A/V Sync
0 ms to 250 ms in 5 ms steps (default: 0 ms)
If HDMI Lip Sync is enabled (see page 113), and your TV or display supports HDMI Lip Sync, the displayed
delay time will be the summation of the A/V Sync delay time and the HDMI Lip Sync delay time. The HDMI
Lip Sync delay time is displayed underneath in parentheses.
Note:
A/V Sync is disabled when the Pure Audio listening mode is selected, or when the Direct listening mode is used
with an analog input source.
104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup—Continued
Name Edit
You can enter a custom name for each individual input selector (excluding TUNER) and radio preset for easy identi-
fication. When entered, the custom name will appear on the display.
Notes:
• To name a radio preset, use the [TUNER] button to select AM or FM, and then select the preset (see page 74).
• (North American models) You cannot enter a custom name for SIRIUS radio presets.
• To restore a custom name to the default, erase the custom name by entering an empty white space for each letter.
Use the arrow [q]/[w]/[e]/[r] buttons to select a character, and then press [ENTER].
1
Repeat this step to enter up to 10 characters.
When you’ve finished, to store a name, be sure to use the arrow [q]/[w]/[e]/[r] buttons to
2
select “OK”, and then press [ENTER].
Otherwise it will not be saved.
Name input area
4 - 3. Name Edit
Name
DVD/BD
A
N
a
B
O
b
C
P
c
D
Q
d
E
R
e
r
F
S
f
G
T
g
t
H
U
h
u
I
V
i
J
W
j
K
L
Y
l
M
Z
m
z
(Left)/ (Right):
Selected when the cursor is moved within the
Name input area.
X
k
x
n
o
p
q
s
v
w
y
Back Space:
“Back Space” deletes one character to the left of
the cursor.
OK:
1
!
{
[
2
@
}
3
#
|
4
$
:
5
6
^
<
7
&
>
8
?
9
(
0
)
–
_
`
~
%
;
’
,
.
/
Selects when the entry is complete.
]
Back Space
OK
Space
To correct a character:
1. Use the arrow [q]/[w]/[e]/[r] buttons to select “ ”(Left) or “ ”(Right) and then press [ENTER].
2. Press [ENTER] several times to select the incorrect character (The cursor moves one letter each time
[ENTER] is pressed).
3. Use the arrow [q]/[w]/[e]/[r] buttons to select the correct character, and then press [ENTER].
Picture Adjust
Using Picture Adjust, you can adjust the picture quality and reduce any noise appearing on the screen.
To view the TV picture while setting, press [ENTER]. To return to the previous screen, press the [RETURN] button.
“Picture Adjust” is not operable when the input selector is set to “NET/USB”.
Tip:
The “Picture Adjust” menus (excluding “Red Brightness” to “Blue Contrast”) can also be set using the [VIDEO]
button on the remote controller.
1. Press the [RECEIVER] button, followed by the [VIDEO] button.
2. Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to select item, and then use the Left and Right [e]/[r] buttons to change
the setting.
Game Mode
Off: Game Mode off (default).
On: Game Mode on.
If video signal delay occurs during playback on a video component (i.e. game console), select the correspond-
ing input source and set the “Game Mode” setting to “On”. The delay will decrease but in return the picture
quality will become poor.
105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup—Continued
Zoom Mode
This setting determines the aspect ratio.
Normal:
Full: (default)
Zoom:
Wide Zoom:
106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup—Continued
ISF Mode
Custom: User setting (All items can be freely set.)
Day: Setting when a room is bright.
Night: Setting when a room is dark.
The receiver has been designed to incorporate setup and calibration standards established by the Imaging Sci-
ence Foundation (ISF). The ISF has developed carefully crafted, industry-recognized standards for optimal
video performance and has implemented a training program for technicians and installers to use these standards
to obtain optimal picture quality from the receiver. Accordingly, Onkyo recommends that setup and calibration
be performed by an ISF Certified installation technician.
*1*2
Auto: The type of content is detected automatically and processed accordingly
(default).
Picture Mode
Video: Select when playing a DVD-Video disc whose content originates from video.
Film: Select when playing a DVD-Video disc whose content originates from film.
DVD-Video disc content originates from either film (recorded at 24 frames per second) or video intended for
TV (recorded at 30 frames per second). With the default Picture Mode setting of Auto, the AV receiver auto-
matically detects the type of content and processes it accordingly to achieve the best picture quality. If the AV
receiver detects the type of content incorrectly due to characteristics of the disc, you can select Video or Film
manually.
*2
Off: Edge enhancement off (default).
Low: Low edge enhancement.
Edge Enhancement
Mid: Medium edge enhancement.
High: High edge enhancement.
With Edge Enhancement, you can make the picture appear sharper.
*1*2
Off: Mosquito noise reduction off (default).
Low: Low mosquito noise reduction.
Mid: Medium mosquito noise reduction.
High: High mosquito noise reduction.
Mosquito NR
With Mosquito Noise Reduction, you can remove the shimmering or haziness that sometimes appears around
objects in the picture. Mosquito noise can be an issue with overly compressed MPEG content.
*1*2
Off: Random noise reduction off (default).
Low: Low random noise reduction.
Mid: Medium random noise reduction.
High: High random noise reduction.
Random NR
With Random Noise Reduction, you can remove indiscriminate picture noise, such as film grain.
*1*2
Off: Block noise reduction off (default).
On: Block noise reduction on.
Block NR
With Block Noise Reduction, you can remove the block distortion that sometimes appears in the picture. Block
noise can be an issue with overly compressed MPEG content.
Notes:
*1 When the “Game Mode” setting is set to “On”, this setting cannot be selected.
*2 When the “ISF Mode” setting is set to “Day” or “Night”, this setting cannot be selected.
107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup—Continued
*2
Through: Select this to pass video through the AV receiver at the same resolution
Resolution
and with no conversion (default).
Auto: Select this to have the AV receiver automatically convert video at
resolutions not supported by your TV. When the “Monitor Out” is set to
“Analog”, this setting will be changed to “Through”.
480p (480/576p):
Select this for 480p or 576p output and video conversion as necessary.
720p: Select this for 720p output and video conversion as necessary.
1080i: Select this for 1080i output and video conversion as necessary.
1080p: Select this for 1080p output and video conversion as necessary. When
the “Monitor Out” is set to “Analog”, this setting will be changed to
“1080i”.
1080p/24: Select this for 1080p output at 24 frames per second and video
conversion as necessary. When the “Monitor Out” is set to “Analog”,
this setting will be changed to “1080i”.
You can specify the output resolution for the HDMI outputs and have the AV receiver upconvert the picture
resolution as necessary to match the resolution supported by your TV.
Available only when “Source” has been selected in the “Resolution” of the “Monitor Out” setting (page 53).
*2
–50 to +50 (default: 0)
Brightness
With this setting you can adjust the picture brightness. “–50” is the darkest. “+50” is the brightest.
*2
–50 to +50 (default: 0)
Contrast
With this setting you can adjust contrast. “–50” is the least. “+50” is the greatest.
*2
–20 to +20 (default: 0)
Hue
With this setting you can adjust the red/green balance. “–20” is the strongest green. “+20” is the strongest red.
*2
–50 to +50 (default: 0)
Saturation
With this setting you can adjust saturation. “–50” is the weakest color. “+50” is the strongest color.
*2
–3 to +3 (default: 0)
Gamma
Adjust the balance of incoming picture R (red), G (green), and B (blue) color data signal to the output color
data signal.
*2
–50 to +50 (default: 0)
Red Brightness
With this setting you can adjust the picture red brightness. “–50” is the darkest. “+50” is the brightest.
*2
–50 to +50 (default: 0)
Red Contrast
With this setting you can adjust red contrast. “–50” is the least. “+50” is the greatest.
*2
–50 to +50 (default: 0)
Green Brightness
With this setting you can adjust the picture green brightness. “–50” is the darkest. “+50” is the brightest.
*2
–50 to +50 (default: 0)
Green Contrast
With this setting you can adjust green contrast. “–50” is the least. “+50” is the greatest.
*2
–50 to +50 (default: 0)
Blue Brightness
With this setting you can adjust the picture blue brightness. “–50” is the darkest. “+50” is the brightest.
*2
–50 to +50 (default: 0)
Blue Contrast
With this setting you can adjust blue contrast. “–50” is the least. “+50” is the greatest.
Notes:
*2 When the “ISF Mode” setting is set to “Day” or “Night”, this setting cannot be selected.
108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup—Continued
Assigning Listening Modes to Input Sources
You can assign a default listening mode to each input source that will be selected automatically when you select each
input source. For example, you can set the default listening mode to be used with Dolby Digital input signals. You can
select other listening modes during playback, but the mode specified here will be resumed once the AV receiver has been
set to Standby.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to
Press the [RECEIVER] button followed by
the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make sure the
appropriate external input is selected on your TV.
4
1
select the signal format that you want to
set, and then use the Left and Right [e]/
[r] buttons to select a listening mode.
When you’ve finished, press the [SETUP]
button.
The setup menu closes.
5
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to
select “5. Listening Mode Preset”, and
then press [ENTER].
2
3
Notes:
The “Listening Mode Preset” menu appears.
• If you connect an input component (such as UP-A1
Dock that seated iPod) to the UNIVERSAL PORT
jack, you can assign only “Analog” to PORT input
source.
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [SETUP] button, arrow buttons,
and [ENTER] button.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to
select the input source that you want to
set, and then press [ENTER].
The signal format selection menu appears.
5–1. Listening Mode Preset
DVD/BD
Analog/PCM
Dolby Digital
DTS
Last Valid
Last Valid
Last Valid
Last Valid
Last Valid
D.F. 2ch
D.F. Mono
For TUNER input source only “Analog” will be
available. For NET/USB input source only “Digi-
tal” will be available.
Listening Mode Preset
Analog/PCM: With this setting, you can specify the listening mode to be used when an analog (CD, TV, LD,
VHS, MD, turntable, radio, cassette, cable, satellite, etc.) or PCM digital (CD, DVD, etc.) audio signal is
played.
Dolby Digital: With this setting, you can specify the listening mode to be used when a Dolby Digital or Dolby
Digital Plus format digital audio signal is played (DVD, etc.).
DTS: With this setting, you can specify the listening mode to be used when a DTS or DTS-HD High Resolution
format digital audio signal is played (DVD, LD, CD, etc.).
D.F. 2ch: Specifies the default listening mode for 2-channel (2/0) stereo sources in a digital format, such as
Dolby Digital or DTS.
D.F. Mono: With this setting, you can specify the listening mode to be used when a mono digital audio signal
is played (DVD, etc.).
Multich PCM: Specifies the default listening mode for multichannel PCM sources input via a HDMI IN, such
as DVD-Audio.
Dolby TrueHD: Specifies the default listening mode for Dolby TrueHD sources, such as Blu-ray or HD DVD
(input via HDMI).
DTS-HD Master Audio: Specifies the default listening mode for DTS-HD Master Audio sources, such as Blu-
ray or HD DVD (input via HDMI).
DSD: Specifies the default listening mode for DSD multichannel sources, such as Super Audio CD.
Only listening modes that can be used with each input signal format can be selected (see pages 82 to 88).
The Last Valid option means that the listening mode selected last will be used.
109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup—Continued
Miscellaneous (Volume/OSD) Setup
This section explains the items on the “Miscellaneous” menu.
Press the [RECEIVER] button followed by
the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make sure the
appropriate external input is selected on your TV.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to
select an item, and then press [ENTER].
The screen for that item appears.
1
3
4
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to
select an item, and use the Left and Right
[e]/[r] buttons to change it.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to
2
select “6. Miscellaneous”, and then press
[ENTER].
The items are explained below.
When you’ve finished, press the [SETUP]
button.
5
The “Miscellaneous” menu appears.
The setup menu closes.
6. Miscellaneous
1. Volume Setup
2. OSD Setup
Note:
This procedure can also be performed on the AV receiver
by using its [SETUP] button, arrow buttons, and
[ENTER] button.
Volume Setup
Volume Display
Absolute: Display range is “Min”, 0.5 through 99.5, “Max”.
Relative: Display range is –Q dB, –81.5 dB through +18.0 dB.
With this setting, you can choose how the volume level is displayed.
The absolute value 82 is equivalent to the relative value 0 dB.
Muting Level
–Q dB (fully muted), –50 dB to –10 dB in 10 dB steps.
This setting determines how much the output is muted when the muting function is used (page 69).
Maximum Volume
Off, 50 to 99 (Absolute display)
Off, –32 dB to +17 dB (Relative display)
With this setting, you can limit the maximum volume.
To disable this setting, select “Off”.
Power On Volume
Last, Min, 1 to 99 or Max (Absolute display)
Last, –Q dB, –81 dB to +18 dB (Relative display)
With this preference, you can specify the volume setting to be used each time the AV receiver is turned on.
To use the same volume level that was used when the AV receiver was turned off, select “Last”.
The “Power On Volume” cannot be set higher than the “Maximum Volume” setting.
Headphone Level
–12 dB to +12 dB
With this preference, you can specify the headphone volume relative to the main volume. This is useful if
there’s a volume difference between your speakers and your headphones.
110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup—Continued
OSD Setup
Immediate Display
On: Displayed (default).
Off: Not displayed.
This preference determines whether operation details are displayed onscreen when an AV receiver function is
adjusted.
Even when “On” is selected, operation details may not be output if the input source is connected to an HDMI
IN.
Display Position
Top: Top of the screen.
This preference determines where on the screen operation details are displayed.
TV Format (European and Asian models)
See “TV Format Setup (European and Asian models)” on page 59.
Language
See “Selecting the Language used for the onscreen setup menus” on page 50.
.
Hardware Setup
This section explains items on the “Hardware Setup” menu.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to
select an item, and then press [ENTER].
The screen for that item appears.
Press the [RECEIVER] button followed by
the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make sure the
appropriate external input is selected on your TV.
3
4
1
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to
select an item, and use the Left and Right
[e]/[r] buttons to change it.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to
2
select “7. Hardware Setup”, and then
press [ENTER].
The items are explained below.
The “Hardware Setup” menu appears.
When you’ve finished, press the
[SETUP] button.
5
7. Hardware Setup
The setup menu closes.
1. Remote ID
2. Multi Zone
3. Tuner
4. HDMI
Note:
5. Network
6. Firmware Update
This procedure can also be performed on the AV receiver
by using its [SETUP] button, arrow buttons, and
[ENTER] button.
111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup—Continued
Remote ID
Remote ID
1, 2, 3
When several Onkyo components are used in the same room, their remote ID codes may overlap. To differen-
tiate the AV receiver from the other components, you can change its remote ID from 1, the default, to 2 or 3.
Changing the Remote Controller’s ID
While holding down the [RECEIVER] button, press and hold down the [SETUP] button
until the [RECEIVER] button lights up (about 3 seconds).
1
Use the number buttons to enter ID 1, 2, or 3.
The [RECEIVER] button flashes twice.
2
Note:
If you do change the AV receiver’s remote ID, be sure to change the remote controller to the same ID, otherwise,
you won’t be able to control it with the remote controller.
Multi Zone
See “Setting the Multi Zone” on page 135.
Tuner
FM/AM Frequency Step (North American models)
AM Frequency Step (European and Asian models)
See “FM/AM Frequency Step Setup” on page 59.
SAT Radio Mode (North American models)
If you connect a SIRIUS Satellite Radio antenna to the AV receiver (sold separately), set this setting to “SIR-
IUS”. See the separate Satellite Radio Guide for more information.
Antenna Aiming (North American models)
The ID of the Sirius Connect Home Tuner is displayed here. You must sign up to obtain a SIRIUS ID. See the
separate Satellite Radio Guide for more information.
SIRIUS Parental Lock (North American models)
This item is for use with SIRIUS Satellite Radio. It’s not available if “SAT Radio Mode” is set to “None”. See
the separate Satellite Radio Guide for more information.
112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup—Continued
HDMI
Audio TV Out
Off: HDMI audio is not output to TV (default).
On: HDMI audio is output to TV and the sound will be heard from the TV
speakers.
This preference determines whether audio received at the HDMI input is output from the HDMI outputs. You
may want to turn this preference on if your TV is connected to the HDMI output and you want to listen to the
audio from a component that’s connected to an HDMI input, through your TV’s speakers. Normally, this should
be set to “Off”.
Notes:
• If “On” is selected and the signal can be output by the TV, the AV receiver will output no sound through its
speakers.
• If “On” is selected, “TV Speaker On” appears on the Display by pressing the [DISPLAY] button.
• With some TVs and input signals, no sound may be output even when this setting is set to “On”. When you
try to get audio from your TV, signals from the source component may be converted to the format supported
by your TV.
• When the “Audio TV Out” setting is set to “On” or “TV Control” is set to “On” to hear from speakers of
will produce sound while the TV’s speakers are muted. If your TV is not compatible with
, the
volume level will not change. To stop the AV receiver’s speakers producing sound, change the settings,
change your TV’s settings, or turn down the AV receiver’s volume.
• When the “Audio TV Out” setting is set to “On”, the remote controller’s [AUDIO] button is disabled.
• If the “Monitor Out” setting is set to “Both (Main)” or “Both (Sub)” (page 52) and if your TV connected to
a priority output cannot output the audio, the sound will be heard from AV receiver’s speakers.
Lip Sync
Disable: HDMI Lip Sync disabled (default).
Enable: HDMI Lip Sync enabled.
The AV receiver can be set to automatically correct any delay between the video and the audio, based on the
data from the connected monitor.
Notes:
• This function works only if your HDMI-compatible TV supports HDMI Lip Sync.
• You can check the amount of delay being applied by the HDMI Lip Sync function on the A/V Sync screen
(see page 104).
• If the “Monitor Out” setting is set to “HDMI Main”, “Both (Main)” or “Both” (page 52), the delay will be
corrected in accordance with the monitor connected to HDMI OUT MAIN. On the other hand, if “HDMI
Sub” or “Both (Sub)” is selected, the delay will be corrected in accordance with the monitor connected to
HDMI OUT SUB.
x.v.Color
Disable: “x.v.Color” disabled (default).
Enable: “x.v.Color” enabled.
If your HDMI source and HDMI-compatible TV both support the “x.v.Color”, you can enable “x.v.Color” on
the AV receiver with this setting.
Notes:
• If the color is unnatural when “x.v.Color” is set to “Enable”, change the setting to “Disable”.
• Refer to the connected component’s instruction manual for details.
• If the “Monitor Out” setting is set to “Both (Main)” or “Both (Sub)” (page 52) and if your TV connected to
a priority output does not support x.v.Color, output will be without x.v.Color control.
113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup—Continued
HDMI Control (RIHD)
On:
Off:
enabled.
disabled (default).
This function allows
receiver.
-compatible components connected via HDMI to be controlled with the AV
Notes:
•
, which stands for Remote Interactive over HDMI, is the name of the system control function found
on Onkyo components. The AV receiver can be used with CEC (Consumer Electronics Control), which
allows system control over HDMI and is part of the HDMI standard. CEC provides interoperability between
various components, however, operation with components other than
not be guaranteed.
-compatible components can-
When set to “On” and close the menu, the name of connected
“RIHD On” are displayed on the AV receiver.
“Search…” → “(name)” → “RIHD On”
-compatible components and
When the AV receiver cannot receive the name of the component, it is displayed as “Player*” or
“Recorder*”, etc (“*” means the number of two or more component).
When set to “Off” and close the menu, “RIHD Off” are displayed on the AV receiver.
“Disconnect” → “RIHD Off”
• Set it to “Off” when a connected piece of equipment is not compatible or it is unclear whether the equipment
is compatible or not.
• Set it to “Off” if the operation is not successful.
• Refer to the connected component’s instruction manual for details.
• The
control does not support HDMI OUT SUB. Use HDMI OUT MAIN instead.
Power Control
On: Power Control enabled.
Off: Power Control disabled.
To link the power functions of
-compatible components connected via HDMI, select “On”.
This setting is set to “On” automatically when the above “HDMI Control (RIHD)” is set to “On” for the first
time.
Notes:
• The “Power Control” setting can be set only when the above “HDMI Control (RIHD)” setting is set to “On”.
• HDMI power control only works with
-compatible components that support it and may not work
properly with some components due to their settings or compatibility.
• When set to “On”, the power consumption on standby mode increases.
• When set to “On”, regardless of whether the AV receiver is On or on Standby, both audio and video received
by an HDMI input will be output from the HDMI output for playback on the TV or other component that’s
connected to the HDMI output.
• Refer to the connected component’s instruction manual for details.
TV Control
On: TV Control enabled.
Off: TV Control disabled.
Set to “On” when you want to control the AV receiver from an
HDMI.
-compatible TV that is connected to
Notes:
• Do not assign the component connected with the HDMI input to the TV/TAPE selector when you set “TV
Control” setting to “On”. Otherwise, appropriate CEC (Consumer Electronics Control) operation is not guar-
anteed.
• Set to “Off” when the TV is not compatible or when it is unclear whether the TV is compatible or not.
• The “TV Control” setting can be set only when the above “HDMI Control (RIHD)” and “Power Control”
settings are both set to “On”.
• Refer to the connected component’s instruction manual for details.
Note:
After changing the settings of the “HDMI Control (RIHD)”, “Power Control”, or “TV Control”, set all connected
pieces of equipment to Standby and then turn them on again. Refer to the User’s Manuals for all connected
pieces of equipment.
114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network
See “Network Settings” on page 126.
Firmware Update
Notes:
• Perform the firmware update only when an announcement is posted on the Onkyo Web site.
• It takes about 60 minutes to complete the firmware update.
• (TX-NR5007) When updating a firmware from a USB mass storage device, the AV receiver searches the device
which is connected earlier during power on. If two devices have been connected at the time of power on, the AV
receiver will search the device on the front panel.
Version
The current version of the firmware is displayed. The version is made up of the versions of the AV receiver and
Onkyo dock (if connected).
Receiver
via NET: You can update the firmware via Internet. Check the network connection
before update.
via USB: You can update the firmware from a USB mass storage device.
You can update the AV receiver’s firmware. Do not shutdown the power of the AV receiver while update.
Universal Port
via NET: You can update the firmware via Internet. Check the network connection
before update.
via USB: You can update the firmware from a USB mass storage device.
You can update the Onkyo dock’s firmware. Do not shutdown the power of the AV receiver while update.
Note:
This update shall not be performed when no dock is connected to UNIVERSAL PORT jack.
115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup—Continued
Lock Setup
Digital Input Signal Formats
With this preference, you can protect your settings by
locking the setup menus.
The digital input signal formats are available only for the
input sources that you have assigned a digital input jack
(see page 56).
Normally, the AV receiver detects the signal format auto-
matically. However, if you experience either of the fol-
lowing issues when playing PCM or DTS material, you
can manually set the signal format to PCM or DTS:
• If the beginnings of tracks from a PCM source are cut
off, try setting the format to PCM.
• If noise is produced when fast forwarding or reversing
a DTS CD, try setting the format to DTS.
• The setting is stored individually for each input selec-
tor.
Press the [RECEIVER] button followed by
the [SETUP] button.
1
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make sure the
appropriate external input is selected on your TV.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to
2
select “9. Lock Setup”, and then press
[ENTER].
The “Lock Setup” menu appears.
9. Lock Setup
Press the [RECEIVER] button, and then
press and hold [AUDIO] button for about
8 seconds.
Lock
Unlocked
1
While “Auto” is displayed (about 3 sec-
2
onds), press the Left and Right [e]/[r]
buttons to select: PCM, DTS or Auto.
PCM:
Only 2-channel PCM format input signals will be
heard. If the input signal is not PCM, the PCM
indicator will flash and noise may also be pro-
duced.
Use the Left and Right [e]/[r] buttons to
select:
3
When the setup menus are locked, you cannot
change any setting.
DTS:
Locked:
Only DTS (but not DTS-HD) format input sig-
nals will be heard. If the input signal is not DTS,
the DTS indicator will flash and there will be no
sound.
Setup menus locked.
Unlocked:
Setup menus not locked.
Auto (default):
Press the [SETUP] button.
The setup menu closes.
4
The format is detected automatically. If no digital
input signal is present, the corresponding analog
input is used instead.
Note:
This procedure can also be performed on the AV receiver
by using its [SETUP] button, arrow buttons, and
[ENTER] button.
116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup—Continued
Using the Audio Settings
You can change various audio settings by pressing the [AUDIO] button.
Press the [RECEIVER] button followed by
the [AUDIO] button.
1
The audio setting items appear on the display.
RECEIVER
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to
2
3
select an item.
qwer
Use the Left and Right [e]/[r] buttons to
change the setting.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the other settings.
AUDIO
Note:
When the “Audio TV Out” setting is set to “On”
(page 113), the [AUDIO] button is disabled.
Tone Control Settings
You can adjust the bass for the front, front wide, front high, center, surround, surround back and subwoofer speakers
and treble for the front, front wide, front high, center, surround and surround back speakers, except when the Direct,
Pure Audio or THX listening mode is selected.
Bass
You can boost or cut low-frequency sounds output by the speakers.
Treble –10 dB to +10 dB in 2 dB steps (default: 0 dB)
–10 dB to +10 dB in 2 dB steps (default: 0 dB)
You can boost or cut high-frequency sounds output by the speakers.
Notes:
• To bypass the bass and treble tone circuits, select the Direct, Pure Audio or THX listening mode.
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV receiver by using its [TONE], Down[e] and Up[r] buttons
(see page 68).
Late Night Function
With the Late Night function, you can reduce the dynamic range of Dolby Digital material so that you can still hear
quiet parts even when listening at low volume levels—ideal for watching movies late at night when you don’t want
to disturb anyone.
Late Night
For Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital Plus sources, the options are:
Off: Late Night function off (default).
Low: Small reduction in dynamic range.
High: Large reduction in dynamic range.
For Dolby TrueHD sources, the options are:
Auto: The Late Night function is set to “On” or “Off” automatically (default).
Off: Late Night function off.
On: Late Night function on.
Notes:
• The effect of the Late Night function depends on the material that you are playing and the intention of the
original sound designer, and with some material there will be little or no effect when you select the different
options.
• The Late Night function can be used only when the input source is Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, or
Dolby TrueHD.
• The Late Night function is set to “Off” when the AV receiver is set to Standby. For Dolby TrueHD sources,
it will be set to “Auto”.
117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup—Continued
Re-EQ Function
With the Re-EQ function, you can compensate a soundtrack whose high-frequency content is too harsh, making it
more suitable for home theater viewing.
Re-EQ
Off: Re-EQ Function off (default).
On: Re-EQ Function on.
This function can be used with the following listening modes: Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus,
Dolby TrueHD, Multichannel, DTS, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS Express,
DSD, Dolby EX, Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height, Dolby PLIIx Movie, Neo:6 Cinema, 5.1-channel source + Neo:6,
and Neural Surround.
Re-EQ(THX)
Off: Re-EQ (THX) Function off.
On: Re-EQ (THX) Function on (default).
This function can be used with the following listening modes: THX Cinema, THX Surround EX, and
THX Ultra2 Cinema.
Note:
Settings for the Re-EQ function are kept in each listening mode. However, in THX listening mode, when the
AV receiver is turned off, it will return to “On”.
Audyssey Dynamic Volume™
Dynamic Volume See “Dynamic Volume” of “Audio Adjust” on page 102.
Note:
If you would like to use Audyssey Dynamic Volume™ in THX listening modes, set “Loudness Plus” setting to
“Off” and set “Preserve THX Settings ” setting to “No”.
Dolby Volume
Dolby Volume
Off: Dolby Volume off (default).
Low: Low Compression Mode becomes active.
Mid: Medium Compression Mode becomes active.
High: High Compression Mode becomes active. This setting affects volume the
most, causing all sounds to be of equal loudness.
Notes:
• When the “Dolby Volume” setting is set to effective, Audyssey Dynamic EQ™ and
Audyssey Dynamic Volume™ will be set to “Off” from “Audyssey” and “Equalizer” setting will be set to
“Off” or remain set to “Manual”.
• If you would like to use Dolby Volume in THX listening modes, set “Loudness Plus” setting to “Off” and set
“Preserve THX Settings ” setting to “No”.
Music Optimizer
The Music Optimizer function enhances the sound quality of compressed music files. Use it with music files that use
“lossy” compression, such as MP3. The setting is stored individually for each input selector.
Music Optimizer
Off: Music Optimizer off (default).
On: Music Optimizer on.
Note:
The Music Optimizer function only works with PCM digital audio input signals with a sampling rate below
48 kHz and analog audio input signals. The Music Optimizer is disabled when the Direct or Pure Audio listen-
ing mode is selected.
118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Setup—Continued
Speaker Levels
You can adjust the volume of each speaker while listening to an input source.
These temporary adjustments are cancelled when the AV receiver is set to Standby. To save the setting you made here,
go to “Level Calibration” on page 97 before setting the AV receiver to Standby.
Subwoofer 1
Subwoofer 2
Center
–15.0 dB to +12.0 dB (default: 0.0 dB)
–15.0 dB to +12.0 dB (default: 0.0 dB)
–12.0 dB to +12.0 dB (default: 0.0 dB)
Notes:
• You cannot use this function while the AV receiver is muted.
• Speakers that are set to “No” or “None” in the “Speaker Configuration” cannot be adjusted (see page 95).
• This function will not work when the Pure Audio or Direct listening mode is selected to play analog audio.
Audio Selector
You can set priorities of audio output when there are both digital and analog inputs.
Audio Selector
Auto: The AV receiver gives priority to analog signals when there is no digital input
(default).
Note:
This setting can be made only for the input source that is assigned as HDMI IN, COAXIAL IN, or OPTICAL
IN. If both HDMI (HDMI IN) and digital audio inputs (COAXIAL IN or OPTICAL IN) are assigned, HDMI
input will be selected as a priority by setting to “Auto”. To select the digital audio input, see “Digital Audio
Input Setup” on page 56.
A/V Sync
See “A/V Sync” of “Source Setup” on page 104.
119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NET/USB
• Depending on your ISP, you may need to specify a
proxy server to use Internet radio. If your computer is
configured to use a proxy server, use the same settings
for the AV receiver (see page 126).
About NET
The AV receiver is network-ready, which means you can
hook it up to your home network with a standard Ether-
net cable and enjoy the music files stored on your com-
puter or media server. If your network is connected to the
Internet, you can also enjoy Internet radio.
Connecting the AV Receiver
To connect the AV receiver to your home network, plug
one end of a shielded CAT5 Ethernet cable into the
AV receiver’s ETHERNET port, and plug the other end
into a LAN port on your router or switch.
The following diagram shows how you can connect the
AV receiver to your home network. In this example, it’s
connected to a LAN port on a router, which has a 4-port
100Base-TX switch built-in.
Network Requirements
■ Ethernet Network
The AV receiver’s Ethernet port supports 10Base-T. For
best results, a 100Base-TX switched Ethernet network is
recommended. Although it’s possible to play music on a
computer that’s connected to the network wirelessly,
playback may be unreliable, so wired connections are
recommended.
■ Ethernet Router
A router manages the network, routing data and supply-
ing IP addresses. Your router must support the following:
• NAT (Network Address Translation). NAT allows sev-
eral networked computers to access the Internet simul-
taneously via a single Internet connection. The
AV receiver needs Internet access for Internet radio.
• DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol).
DHCP supplies IP addresses to network devices,
allowing them to configure themselves automatically.
• A router with a 100Base-TX switch built-in is recom-
mended.
Internet radio
Modem
Some routers have a modem built-in, and some ISPs
require you to use specific routers. Please consult your
ISP or computer dealer if you’re unsure.
WAN port
Router
LAN port
LAN port
■ CAT5 Ethernet cable
Use a shielded CAT5 Ethernet cable (straight-type) to
connect the AV receiver to your home network.
■ Internet Access (for Internet radio)
To receive Internet radio, your Ethernet network must
have Internet access. A narrowband Internet connection
(e.g., 56K modem, ISDN) will not provide satisfactory
results, so a broadband connection is strongly recom-
mended (e.g., cable modem, xDSL modem, etc). Please
consult your ISP or computer dealer if you’re unsure.
LAN/Ethernet port
Computer or media server
Notes:
• To receive Internet radio with the AV receiver, your
able to access the Web. Consult your ISP if you have
any problems with your Internet connection.
• The AV receiver uses DHCP to configure its network
settings automatically. If you want to configure these
settings manually, see page 126.
• The AV receiver does not support PPPoE settings, so
if you have a PPPoE-type Internet connection, you
must use a PPPoE-compatible router.
120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NET/USB—Continued
The NETWORK indicator lights up.
When the program setting is finished,
go to step 3.
Listening to Internet Radio
To receive Internet radio, you must connect the
AV receiver to a network with Internet access
(page 120).
You can select Internet radio stations by connecting to
the AV receiver from your computer and selecting sta-
tions in your Web browser. Preset up to 40 Internet radio
stations.
Notes:
• When it flashes, confirm the network
connection.
• Services available may vary depend-
ing on the region. See the separate
instructions for more information.
Internet radio URLs in the following formats are sup-
ported: PLS, M3U, and podcast (RSS). However,
depending on the type of data or audio format used by
the Internet radio station, you may not be able to listen to
some stations.
On your computer, start your
Web browser and enter the
AV receiver’s IP address in the
browser’s Internet address (URL)
field.
The browser connects to the
AV receiver and displays the same
screen as the AV receiver.
2
■ vTuner Internet Radio
• This unit includes the full vTuner Internet Radio Ser-
vice at no additional charge. Once you have connected
your unit to the Internet you can select vTuner Internet
Radio to search for and play Internet radio stations and
podcasts at any time. To enhance your Internet radio
available to you as an easy way to browse to find sta-
tions, set up/organize your favorites, add your own
stations, get help, etc. After the first time you try Inter-
net radio/vTuner on your unit you can use the MAC
Address of your unit to create a member login account
(email address and password) on the
Select the Internet radio station
with your browser.
Notes:
• The AV receiver’s IP address is
shown on the “Network” screen (see
page 126).
• If you’re using DHCP, your router
may not always allocate the same IP
address to the AV receiver, so if you
find that you can’t connect to the
AV receiver, recheck the
http://onkyo.vtuner.com/ portal. To verify your MAC
Address, please see Network Settings (page 126).
AV receiver’s IP address on “Net-
work” screen.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w]
buttons to select a program, and
then press [ENTER].
3
Playback starts and the following
screen appears.
NET/USB
All Stations
- - -
qwer
1. fm indie 104
The internet’s best source for i
ENTER
ꢀ
0:00:00
WMA 128kbps 16bit/44.1kHz
Press the [NET/USB] button
repeatedly to select the Internet
Radio screen.
Once you’ve added a station to the list, simply select it
on the Internet Radio screen, and then press [ENTER] to
start playback.
1
Note:
Internet Radio
If you’re using a narrowband Internet connection (e.g.,
56K modem or ISDN), depending on the station, Internet
radio may not work satisfactorily. For best results, use a
broadband connection (e.g., cable modem, xDSL
modem, etc).
1. vTuner Internet Radio
2. Pandora Internet Radio
3. Rhapsody
4. SIRIUS Internet Radio
5. ---
6. ---
7. ---
8. ---
9. ---
10. ---
121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NET/USB—Continued
Playing Music Files on a Server
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w]
buttons to select an item, and
then press [ENTER].
4
5
This section explains how to play music files on a com-
puter or media server through the AV receiver. See
pages 124 to 125 for details on supported music servers
and music file formats.
For Windows Media Player 11, see “Windows Media
Player 11 Setup” on page 123.
A list of music files appears.
All Music
Song 1
Song 2
Song 3
My favorite song 1
My favorite song 2
My favorite song 3
My favorite song 4
My favorite song 5
My favorite song 6
My favorite song 7
1 / 10
Start your computer or media
server.
1
Press the [NET/USB] button to
select the Server screen.
2
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w]
buttons to select a music file, and
press the [ENTER] or Play [1]
button to start playback.
Playback starts and the following
screen appears.
Server
Server1
Server2
Server3
Server4
Server5
Server6
Server7
Server8
Server9
Server10
My favorite song 1
1 / 10
4 / 10
My favorite song 1
The NETWORK indicator lights up.
Artist name
My favorite album
0:00:00
MP3 0kbps 0kHz
ALL
Notes:
• When it flashes, confirm the network
connection.
or
• To update the screen, press the
[RETURN] button.
To return to the previous menu during
playback, press the [RETURN] button.
To stop playback, press the Stop [2]
button.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w]
3
buttons to select a server, and
then press [ENTER].
A list of items on the server appears.
To select the next song, press the Next
[6] button. To select the beginning
of the current song, press the Previous
[7] button. To select the previous
song, press the Previous [7] button
twice.
Server1
Search
Recently Added
Artists
Album
Songs
Genre
Year
Rating
To pause playback, press the [3] but-
ton. To fast forward the current song,
press the [4] button. To fast reverse
the current song, press the [5] but-
ton.
1 / 8
Search
You can search for music by Artist,
Album, or Track.
Note:
For some sort of media server, Fast For-
ward/Fast Reverse/Pause operations do
not work.
Notes:
• The search function does not work
with media servers which do not sup-
port this function.
• Depending on the sharing settings in
the media server, the AV receiver
may not able to access the content.
Refer to the instruction manual of the
media server.
122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NET/USB—Continued
Random Playback
The Random function can only be set while the PLAY
screen is displayed.
To play songs in random order, during playback (or
while playback is paused or stopped), press the [RAN-
DOM] button. All of the songs in the current folder will
be played in random order. When all of the songs in the
folder have been played once, they’ll all be played again
in a different random order. To cancel random playback,
press the [RANDOM] button again.
Windows Media Player 11 Setup
This section explains how to configure Windows Media
Player 11 so that the AV receiver can play the music files
stored on your computer.
Start Windows Media Player 11.
1
On the Library menu, select Media
Sharing.
2
Random playback supports up to 20000 songs per folder.
If a folder contains more than this, songs over 20000 are
not included in random playback.
The Media Sharing dialog box appears.
Select the Share my media check box,
and then click OK.
3
Repeat Playback
The Repeat function can only be set while the PLAY
screen is displayed.
To play songs repeatedly, during playback (or while
playback is paused or stopped), press the [REPEAT] but-
ton repeatedly to select: Repeat1, Repeat Folder, Repeat
All, or Off.
In Repeat1 mode, the current song is played repeatedly.
In Repeat Folder mode, all of the songs in the current
folder are played repeatedly.
In Repeat All mode, all of the songs on the current server
are played repeatedly.
Select the AV receiver in the list, and
then click Allow.
4
Click OK to close the dialog box.
This completes the Windows Media Player 11
configuration.
You can now play the music files in your Win-
dows Media Player 11 library through the
AV receiver (see page 122).
5
Note:
To cancel repeat playback, press the [REPEAT] button
repeatedly to select Off.
Windows Media Player 11 can be downloaded for free
from the Microsoft Web site.
Note:
If the message “No Item.” appears, this means that no
information can be retrieved from the server. In this case,
check your server, network, and AV receiver connec-
tions.
123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NET/USB—Continued
■ AAC
Supported Audio File Formats
AAC stands for MPEG-2/MPEG-4 Audio.
• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz,
16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,
48 kHz, 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96 kHz and bitrates of
between 8 and 320 kbps, are supported. Incompatible
files cannot be played.
• Number of channels: 2
• Variable bit-rate (VBR) files are supported. (Playing
times may not display correctly.)
For server playback, the AV receiver supports the fol-
lowing music file formats: MP3, WMA, WAV, FLAC,
Ogg Vorbis, AAC and LPCM.
■ MP3
• MP3 files must be MPEG-1/MPEG-2 Audio Layer 3
format with a sampling rate of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz,
12 kHz, 16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz,
44.1 kHz, 48 kHz and a bit-rate of between 8 kbps and
320 kbps. Incompatible files cannot be played.
• Number of channels: 2
• Variable bit-rate (VBR) MP3 files are supported.
(Playing times may not display correctly.)
• MP3 files must have a “.mp3” or “.MP3” filename
extension.
AAC files must have a “.aac”, “.m4a”, “.mp4”, “.3gp”,
“.3g2”, “.AAC”, “.M4A”, “.MP4”, “.3GP” or “.3G2”
filename extension.
■ FLAC
FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compres-
sion.
•
Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz,
16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,
48 kHz, 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz, and 96 kHz are supported.
Incompatible files cannot be played.
Quantization bit: 8 bit, 16 bit, 24 bit
Number of channels: 2
Variable bit-rates (VBR) are supported. (Playing
times may display incorrectly with VBR.)
FLAC files must have a “.flac” or “.FLAC” filename
extension.
■ WMA
WMA stands for Windows Media Audio and is an audio
compression technology developed by Microsoft Corpo-
ration. Audio can be encoded in WMA format by using
®
Windows Media Player.
•
•
•
• WMA files must have the copyright option turned off.
• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz,
16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,
48 kHz and bitrates of between 5 kbps and 320 kbps,
and WMA DRM are supported. Incompatible files
cannot be played.
• Number of channels: 2
• Variable bit-rates (VBR) are supported. (Playing times
may display incorrectly with VBR.)
•
■ Ogg Vorbis
•
Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz,
16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,
48 kHz and bitrates of between 48 kbps and 500 kbps
are supported. Incompatible files cannot be played.
• WMA Pro/Voice formats are not supported.
• WMA files must have a “.wma” or “.WMA” filename
extension.
• Number of channels: 2
•
Variable bit-rates (VBR) are supported. (Playing
times may display incorrectly with VBR.)
Ogg Vorbis files must have a “.ogg” or “.OGG” file-
name extension.
■ WMA Lossless
•
Sampling rates of 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz,
96 kHz and bitrates of between 5 kbps and 320 kbps
are supported. Incompatible files cannot be played.
Quantization bit: 16 bit, 24 bit
Number of channels: 2
Variable bit-rates (VBR) are supported. (Playing
times may display incorrectly with VBR.)
•
■ LPCM (Linear PCM)
•
•
•
•
Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz,
16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,
48 kHz, 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz, and 96 kHz are supported.
Quantization bit: 8 bit, 16 bit, 24 bit
•
•
• WMA files must have a “.wma” or “.WMA” filename
extension.
Number of channels: 2
■ WAV
WAV files contain uncompressed PCM digital audio.
• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz,
16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,
48 kHz, 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz, and 96 kHz are supported.
Incompatible files cannot be played.
• Quantization bit: 8 bit, 16 bit, 24 bit
• Number of channels: 2
• WAV files must have a “.wav” or “.WAV” filename
extension.
124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NET/USB—Continued
Server Requirements
The AV receiver can play digital music files stored on a
computer or media server and supports the following
technologies:
• Windows Media Player 11
• Windows Media Connect 2.0
• DLNA-certified media server
If the operating system of your computer is Windows
Vista, Windows Media Player 11 is already installed.
Windows Media Player 11 for Windows XP can be
downloaded for free from the Microsoft Web site.
• The computer or media server must be on the same
network as the AV receiver.
• Each folder may contain up to 20000 music files, and
folders may be nested up to 16 levels deep.
Note:
For some sort of media server, the AV receiver may not
able to recognize it, or may not able to play stored music
files.
Minimum system requirements for Windows
Media Player 11 for Windows XP
Operating system
Windows XP Home Edition (SP2), Windows XP Pro-
fessional (SP2), Windows XP Tablet PC Edition (SP2),
Update Rollup 2 for Windows XP Media Center Edi-
tion 2005 (KB900325), October 2006 Update Rollup
for Windows XP Media Center Edition (KB925766)
Processor:
233 MHz Intel Pentium II, Advanced
Micro Devices (AMD), etc.
Memory:
Hard disk:
Drive:
64 MB
200 MB of free space
CD or DVD drive
28.8 kbps
Modem:
Sound card:
Monitor:
Video card:
Software:
16-bit sound card
Super VGA (800 x 600)
64 MB VRAM, DirectX 9.0b
Microsoft ActiveSync (only when
using a Windows Mobile-based
Pocket PC or smartphone)
Web browser: Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 or
Netscape 7.1
About DLNA
The Digital Living Network Alliance is an international,
cross-industry collaboration. Members of DLNA
develop a concept of wired and wireless interoperable
networks where digital content such as photos, music,
and videos can be shared through consumer electronics,
personal computers, and mobile devices in and beyond
the home. The AV receiver certificate the DLNA
Interoperability Guidelines version 1.5.
125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NET/USB—Continued
Network Settings
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w]
buttons to select “5. Network”,
and then press [ENTER].
3
4
Note:
When modifying network settings, after modifying it is
necessary to execute “Save”.
The “Network” screen appears.
7-5. Network
MAC Address
DHCP
xx : xx : xx − yy : yy : yy
Enable
This section explains how to configure the AV receiver’s
network settings manually.
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway
aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
If your router’s DHCP server is enabled, you don’t need
to change any of these settings, as the AV receiver is set
use DHCP to configure itself automatically by default
(i.e., DHCP is set to Enable). If, however, your router’s
DHCP server is disabled, for example, you’re using
static IP addresses, you’ll need to configure these set-
tings yourself, in which case, a knowledge of Ethernet
networking is essential.
DNS Server
Proxy URL
Proxy Port
http://www.proxy.xxx.com
8080
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w]
buttons to select the setting, and
use the Left and Right [e]/[r]
buttons to set them.
What’s DHCP?
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) is used
by routers, computers, the AV receiver, and other
devices to automatically configure themselves on a net-
work.
To enter an IP address, select the set-
ting, and then press [ENTER]. The
arrow [q]/[w]/[e]/[r] buttons can
then be used to enter numbers. Press
[ENTER] again to set the number.
The settings are explained below.
What’s DNS?
The DNS (Domain Name System) translates domain
names into IP addresses. For example, when you enter a
domain name such as www.onkyousa.com in your Web
browser, before accessing the site, your browser uses
DNS to translate this into an IP address, in this case
63.148.251.142.
When you’ve finished, press the
[RETURN] button.
The save confirmation screen appears.
5
6
7-5. Network
Save
Cancel
Press the [RECEIVER] button,
1
followed by the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make
sure the appropriate external input is
selected on your TV.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w]
buttons to select “Save”, and
then press [ENTER].
When modifying network settings,
after modifying it is necessary to exe-
cute “Save”.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w]
2
buttons to select “7. Hardware
Setup”, and then press [ENTER].
The “Hardware Setup” menu appears.
7. Hardware Setup
When you’ve finished, press the
[SETUP] button.
The setup menu closes.
1. Remote ID
2. Multi Zone
3. Tuner
7
4. HDMI
5. Network
6. Firmware Update
Note:
This procedure can also be performed on the AV receiver
by using its [SETUP] button, arrow buttons, and
[ENTER] button.
126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NET/USB—Continued
Note:
Mac Address
When set to “Enable”, power consumption on standby
mode slightly increases.
This is the AV receiver’s MAC (Media Access Control)
address. This address cannot be changed.
■ Port Number
DHCP
This is the network port used for control over the net-
work.
This setting determines whether or not the AV receiver
uses DHCP to automatically configure its IP Address,
Subnet Mask, Gateway, and DNS Server settings.
Enable: DHCP enabled.
Note:
Set the port number between from “49152” to “65535”.
About USB
Disable: DHCP disabled.
If you select “Disable”, you must configure the “IP
Address”, “Subnet Mask”, “Gateway”, and “DNS
Server” settings yourself.
USB can be used to play music files stored on USB mass
storage devices (e.g., USB flash drives and MP3 play-
ers), which can be plugged into the AV receiver’s USB
port.
IP Address
Supported Audio File Formats
If you set the “DHCP” setting to “Disable”, you must
specify an IP address. Enter a static IP address provided
by your ISP.
For USB mass storage device playback, the AV receiver
supports music file formats.
The IP address must be within the following ranges.
ClassA: 10.0.0.0 to 10.255.255.255
ClassB: 172.16.0.0 to 172.31.255.255
ClassC: 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.255
Most routers use Class C IP addresses.
See “Supported Audio File Formats” on page 124.
USB Mass Storage Device Requirements
• The AV receiver supports USB devices that support
the USB mass storage device class.
• Playback may not be possible with some USB devices
even if they conform to the USB mass storage device
class.
• USB devices formatted with the FAT16 or FAT32 file
system are supported.
• If the storage device has been partitioned, each section
will be treated as an independent device.
• Each folder may contain up to 20000 music files and
folders, and folders may be nested up to 16 levels
deep.
Subnet Mask
If you set the “DHCP” setting to “Disable”, you must
specify a subnet mask address.
Enter the subnet mask address provided by your ISP
(typically: 255.255.255.0).
Gateway
If you set the “DHCP” setting to “Disable”, you must
specify a gateway address.
Enter the gateway address provided by your ISP.
• USB hubs and USB devices with hub functions are not
supported.
DNS Server
If you set the “DHCP” setting to “Disable”, you must
specify a DNS server.
Enter the DNS server addresses provided by your ISP.
Proxy URL
To use a Web proxy, enter its URL here.
Proxy Port
If you’re using a Web proxy, enter a proxy port number
here.
Control
This setting enables or disables control over the network.
Enable: Control over the network enabled.
Disable: Control over the network disabled.
127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NET/USB—Continued
Playing Music Files on a USB Device
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w]
buttons to select a USB mass
storage device, and then press
[ENTER].
3
This section explains how to play music files on a USB
mass storage device.
A list of the device’s contents appears.
USB Storage
Folder1
Folder2
01_Song_Track1
02_Song_Track2
03_Song_Track3
04_Song_Track4
05_Song_Track5
06_Song_Track6
07_Song_Track7
08_Song_Track8
2 / 5
NET/USB
RECEIVER
qwer
To open a folder, use the Up and Down
[q]/[w] buttons to select it, and then
press [ENTER].
ENTER
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w]
buttons to select a music file, and
press the [ENTER] or Play [1]
button to start playback.
Playback starts and the following
screen appears.
4
1
Plug your USB mass storage
device into the AV receiver’s USB
port.
1
Folder1
1/17
02_Song_Track2
Artist
Album
(TX-NR3007)
01:12:34
00:10
2
MP3 128kbps 16bit/44.1kHz
Press the [NET/USB] button
repeatedly to select the USB
screen.
or
(TX-NR5007)
To return to the previous menu during
playback, press the [RETURN] button.
To stop or pause playback, press the
Stop [2] or Pause [3] button, respec-
tively.
Press the [NET/USB] button
repeatedly to select the
USB(Front) or USB(Rear) screen.
USB(Front)
USB Storage
To select the next song, press the Next
[6] button. To select the beginning
of the current song, press the Previous
[7] button. To select the previous
song, press the Previous [7] button
twice.
1 / 1
To fast forward the current song, press
the [4] button. To fast reverse the
current song, press the [5] button.
The USB indicator lights up if the
AV receiver is able to read the USB
mass storage device. The USB indica-
tor flashes if the AV receiver cannot
read the USB mass storage device.
128
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NET/USB—Continued
Random Playback
The Random function can only be set while the PLAY
screen is displayed.
To play songs in random order, while the list of songs is
displayed, press the [RANDOM] button. All of the songs
in the current folder will be played in random order.
When all of the songs in the folder have been played
once, they’ll all be played again in a different random
order. To cancel random playback, press the [RAN-
DOM] button again.
• If the USB mass storage device contains a lot of data,
the AV receiver make take a while to read it.
• USB memory devices with security functions cannot
be played.
Random playback supports up to 20,000 songs per
folder. If a folder contains more than this, songs over
20,000 are not included in random playback.
Repeat Playback
The Repeat function can only be set while the PLAY
screen is displayed.
To play songs repeatedly, during playback (or while
playback is paused or stopped), press the [REPEAT] but-
ton repeatedly to select: Repeat1, Repeat Folder, Repeat
All, or Off.
In Repeat1 mode, the current song is played repeatedly.
In Repeat Folder mode, all of the songs in the current
folder are played repeatedly.
In Repeat All mode, all of the songs on the USB mass
storage device (in the same partition) are played repeat-
edly.
To cancel repeat playback, press the [REPEAT] button
repeatedly to select Off.
Notes:
• If you connect a USB hard disk drive to the
AV receiver’s USB port, we recommend that you use
its AC adapter to power it.
• Do not connect the AV receiver’s USB port to a USB
port on your computer. Music on your computer can-
not be played through the AV receiver in this way.
• The AV receiver supports USB MP3 players that sup-
port the USB Mass Storage Class standard, which
allows USB storage devices to be connected to com-
puters without the need for special drivers or software.
Note that not all USB MP3 players support the USB
Mass Storage Class standard. Refer your USB MP3
player’s instruction manual for details.
• Protected WMA music files on an MP3 player cannot
be played.
• Onkyo accepts no responsibility whatsoever for the
loss or damage to data stored on a USB mass storage
device when that device is used with the AV receiver.
We recommend that you back up your important
music files beforehand.
• MP3 players containing music files that are managed
with special music software, and the iPod containing
music files managed with iTunes are not supported.
• Operation with all USB mass storage devices includ-
ing the ability to power them is not guaranteed.
• Do not connect your USB mass storage device via a
USB hub. The USB mass storage device must be con-
nected directly to the AV receiver’s USB port.
129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Multi Zone
Multiroom Capability
You can use three speaker systems with this AV receiver—Main room: a surround-sound speaker system (up to 9.2
channels) for enjoying DVD movies in your main room, Speakers B: a pair of stereo speakers for serious music listening
in your main room, Zone 2: a stereo speaker system in a second room, Zone 3: a stereo speaker system in a third room.
And, you can select a different audio source for each room.
You can enjoy the various listening modes, such as Dolby, DTS, and THX (see pages 81 to 91).
* While Powered Zone 2/3 is being used, playback is reduced to 7.2-channels (see pages 131 and 133).
Zone 2: In your Zone 2 room, you can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback and video playback (see page 131).
* The listening modes cannot be used with Zone 2.
Zone 3: In your Zone 3 room, you can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback (see page 133).
* The listening modes cannot be used with Zone 3.
Main Room
Front wide left and right speakers
Front high left and right speakers
When the speaker is connected with
the Powered Zone 2, these speakers
cannot be connected (page 131).
While Powered Zone 2 is being used,
nothing is output by these speakers
(page 131).
Front speakers
Center speaker
Subwoofer
Surround back left and right
speakers
When the speaker is connected with
the Powered Zone 3, these speakers
cannot be connected (page 133).
Surround left and right speakers
Zone 2 Room
Zone 3 Room
Left and right
Left and right
stereo speakers
stereo speakers
130
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Multi Zone—Continued
In addition to your main listening room, you can also enjoy playback in the other room, or as we call Multi Zone. And,
you can select a different source for each room.
Connecting Your Zone 2 Speakers to an
Amp in Zone 2
Connecting Zone 2
There are two ways you can connect Zone 2 speakers:
This setup allows 9.2-channel playback in your main lis-
1. Connect them directly to the AV receiver.
tening room and 2-channel stereo playback in Zone 2,
2. Connect them to an amp in Zone 2.
with a different source in each room.
Hookup
Connecting Your Zone 2 Speakers Directly
to the AV receiver
• Use an RCA audio cable to connect the AV receiver’s
ZONE 2 PRE OUT L/R jacks to an analog audio input
This setup allows 7.2-channel playback in your main
room and 2-channel stereo playback in Zone 2, with a
different source in each room. This is called Powered
receiver. Note that when Powered Zone 2 is turned off,
you can enjoy 9.2-channel playback in your main room.
on your Zone 2 amp.
• Connect your Zone 2 speakers to the speaker terminals
on your Zone 2 amp.
Main room
TV
To use this setup, you must set the “Powered Zone2”
setting to “Act” (see page 134).
Hookup
• Connect your Zone 2 speakers to the AV receiver’s
FRONT WIDE/ZONE 2 L/R speaker terminals.
AV receiver
Main room
TV
Zone 2
IN
R
L
AV receiver
R
L
Receiver/
integrated amp
Note:
With the default settings, the Zone 2 volume must be set
on the Zone 2 amp. If your Zone 2 amp has no volume
control, set the “Zone2 Out” setting to “Variable” so that
you can set the Zone 2 volume on the AV receiver (see
page 135).
Zone 2
R
L
Notes:
• With this setup, the Zone 2 volume is controlled by the
AV receiver.
• Powered Zone2 cannot be used if “Speakers
Type(FrontB)” is set to “Normal”, “Bi-Amp” or
“BTL” (see page 57).
131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Multi Zone—Continued
Zone 2 Video Output
The AV receiver features a composite video output for
connection to a TV in Zone 2, so you can enjoy both
audio and video in that zone.
Hookup
• Use a composite video cable to connect the AV
receiver’s ZONE 2 OUT V jack to a composite video
input on your Zone 2 TV.
Main room
TV
AV receiver
Zone 2
TV
Note:
The ZONE 2 OUT V jack outputs video from compo-
nents connected to composite video only.
Zone 2 12V Trigger
When Zone 2 is turned on, the output from the 12V
TRIGGER OUT ZONE 2 goes high (+12 volts, 150 mil-
liamperes max). Connecting this jack to a 12-volt trigger
input on a component in Zone 2 will make that compo-
nent turn on or off as and when Zone 2 is turned on or off
on the AV receiver.
132
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Multi Zone—Continued
Connecting Your Zone 3 Speakers to an
Amp in Zone 3
Connecting Zone 3
There are two ways you can connect Zone 3 speakers:
1. Connect them directly to the AV receiver.
2. Connect them to an amp in Zone 3.
This setup allows 9.2-channel playback in your main lis-
tening room and 2-channel stereo playback in Zone 3,
with a different source in each room.
Hookup
Connecting Your Zone 3 Speakers Directly
to the AV receiver
• Use an RCA audio cable to connect the AV receiver’s
ZONE 3 PRE OUT L/R jacks to an analog audio input
on your Zone 3 amp.
• Connect your Zone 3 speakers to the speaker terminals
on your Zone 3 amp.
This setup allows 7.2-channel playback in your main
room and 2-channel stereo playback in Zone 3, with a
different source in each room. This is called Powered
receiver. Note that when Powered Zone 3 is turned off,
you can enjoy 9.2-channel playback in your main room.
Main room
TV
To use this setup, you must set the “Powered Zone3”
setting to “Act” (see page 134).
Hookup
• Connect your Zone 3 speakers to the AV receiver’s
SURR BACK/ZONE 3 L/R speaker terminals.
AV receiver
Main room
TV
Zone 3
IN
R
L
AV receiver
R
L
Receiver/
integrated amp
Note:
With the default settings, the Zone 3 volume must be set
on the Zone 3 amp. If your Zone 3 amp has no volume
control, set the “Zone3 Out” setting to “Variable” so that
you can set the Zone 3 volume on the AV receiver (see
page 135).
Zone 3
R
L
Zone 3 12V Trigger
Notes:
When Zone 3 is turned on, the output from the 12V
TRIGGER OUT ZONE 3 goes high (+12 volts, 25 mil-
liamperes max). Connecting this jack to a 12-volt trigger
input on a component in Zone 3 will make that compo-
nent turn on or off as and when Zone 3 is turned on or off
on the AV receiver.
• With this setup, the Zone 3 volume is controlled by the
AV receiver.
• Powered Zone3 cannot be used if “Speakers
Type(FrontA)” or “Speakers Type(FrontB)” is set to
“Bi-Amp” or “BTL” (see page 57).
133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Multi Zone—Continued
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w]
buttons to select “Powered
Zone2” or “Powered Zone3”, and
use the Left and Right [e]/[r]
buttons to select:
If you’ve connected your Zone 2/3 speakers to the AV
receiver, as explained in “Connecting Your Zone 2
Speakers Directly to the AV receiver” on page 131 or
“Connecting Your Zone 3 Speakers Directly to the AV
receiver” on page 133, you must set the “Powered
Zone2” or “Powered Zone3” setting to “Act” (Acti-
vated).
Not Act:
ZONE 2/3 L/R speaker terminals
not activated (Powered Zone 2/3
disabled).
Act:
Press the [RECEIVER] button
1
ZONE 2/3 L/R speaker terminals
activated (Powered Zone 2/3
enabled).
followed by the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make
sure the appropriate external input is
selected on your TV.
Press the [SETUP] button.
The setup menu closes.
5
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w]
2
Notes:
buttons to select “2. Speaker
Setup”, and then press [ENTER].
The “Speaker Setup” menu appears.
Type(FrontB)” setting set to “Normal”, “Bi-Amp” or
“BTL” (see page 58).
• Powered Zone3 cannot be used if “Speakers
Type(FrontA)” or “Speakers Type(FrontB)” setting
set to “Bi-Amp” or “BTL” (see page 58).
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV
receiver by using its [SETUP] button, arrow buttons,
and [ENTER] button.
2. Speaker Setup
1. Speaker Settings
2. Speaker Configuration
3. Speaker Distance
4. Level Calibration
5. Equalizer Settings
6. THX Audio Setup
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w]
3
buttons to select “1. Speaker
Settings”, and then press
[ENTER].
The “Speaker Settings” menu appears.
2–1. Speaker Settings
Speaker Impedance
Speakers Type(FrontA)
Speakers Type(FrontB)
Powered Zone2
6ohms
Normal
Not Use
Not Act
Not Act
Powered Zone3
134
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Multi Zone—Continued
When you’ve finished, press the
[SETUP] button.
Setting the Multi Zone
5
Press the [RECEIVER] button
The setup menu closes.
1
followed by the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make
sure the appropriate external input is
selected on your TV.
Note:
This procedure can also be performed on the AV receiver
by using its [SETUP] button, arrow buttons, and
[ENTER] button.
■ Zone2/3 Out
If you’ve connected your Zone 2/3 speakers to an amp
with no volume control, set the “Zone2 Out” and “Zone3
Out” setting, respectively, to “Variable” so that you can
set the volume, balance, and tone of zone 2/3 on the AV
receiver.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w]
buttons to select “7. Hardware
Setup”, and then press [ENTER].
The “Hardware Setup” menu appears.
2
7. Hardware Setup
Fixed: The Zone 2/3 volume must be set on the
amp in that zone (default).
Variable: The Zone 2/3 volume can be set on the AV
1. Remote ID
2. Multi Zone
3. Tuner
4. HDMI
5. Network
6. Firmware Update
receiver.
■ Zone2/3 Maximum Volume
With this setting, you can limit the maximum volume for
Zone 2/3. When the “Volume Display” setting is set to
“Absolute”, the “Maximum Volume” range is 50 to 99.
When it’s set to “Relative”, the range is –32 dB to
+17 dB. To disable this setting, select “Off”.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w]
buttons to select “2. Multi Zone”,
and then press [ENTER].
3
4
The “Multi Zone” menu appears.
■ Zone2/3 Power On Volume
7–2. Multi Zone
This setting determines what the volume will be for
Zone 2/3 each time the AV receiver is turned on.
When the “Volume Display” preference is set to “Abso-
lute”, the range is “Last”, “Min”, 1 to 99, or “Max”.
When it’s set to “Relative”, the range is “Last”, –Q dB,
–81 dB to +18 dB.
Zone2 Out
Zone2 Maximum Volume
Zone2 Power On Volume
Fixed
Off
Last
Zone3 Out
Zone3 Maximum Volume
Zone3 Power On Volume
Fixed
Off
Last
To use the same volume level as when the AV receiver
was last turned off, select “Last”.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w]
buttons to select an item, and
use the Left and Right [e]/[r]
buttons to change it.
The “Zone2/3 Power On Volume” cannot be set higher
than the “Zone2/3 Maximum Volume” setting.
The items are explained below.
135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Multi Zone—Continued
Controlling Zone 2/3 with the Remote
Controller
Using Zone 2/3
This section explains how to turn Zone 2/3 on and off,
how to select an input source for Zone 2/3, and how to
adjust the volume for Zone 2/3.
STANDBY
ZONE
ON
Controlling Zone 2/3 from the AV receiver
INPUT
SELECTOR
ZONE 3 indicator
ZONE 2 indicator
Note:
To control Zone 2/3, you must press the remote control-
ler’s [ZONE] button first.
The ZONE button turns red while Zone 2 is on, and
green while Zone 3 is on.
Press the [ZONE] button
1
Input selector buttons
ZONE 3
OFF
repeatedly, then point the remote
controller at the AV receiver and
press the [ON] button.
ZONE 2
To turn on Zone 2/3 and select an
input source, press the [ZONE 2]
or [ZONE 3] button followed by
an input selector button within 8
seconds.
1
Tip:
The 12V TRIGGER OUT ZONE 2/3
goes high (+12 V).
Zone 2/3 turns on, the ZONE 2/3 indi-
cator lights up.
Tip:
To select an input source for
The 12V TRIGGER OUT ZONE 2/3
goes high (+12 V).
2
Zone 2/3, press the [ZONE]
button repeatedly, followed by an
INPUT SELECTOR button.
To select AM or FM press the
[TUNER] INPUT SELECTOR and the
[ZONE] button repeatedly. You can
also select SIRIUS (North American
models).
To select AM or FM press the
[TUNER] input selector and the
[ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3] button repeat-
edly. You can also select SIRIUS
(North American models).
To select the same source as that of the
main room, press the [ZONE 2] or
[ZONE 3] button twice. “Zone 2 Selec-
tor: Source” or “Zone 3 Selector:
Source” appears on the display.
To turn off Zone 2/3, press the
[ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3] button.
The ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 indicator
flashes.
Press the [OFF] button.
The zone is turned off, and the ZONE 2
or ZONE 3 indicator goes off.
2
To turn off Zone 2/3, press the
3
[ZONE] button repeatedly,
followed by the [STANDBY]
button.
Note:
When Zone 2/3 is turned off, the output from the 12V
TRIGGER OUT ZONE 2/3 goes low (0 volts).
136
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Multi Zone—Continued
Notes:
Muting Zones
• Only analog input sources are output by the ZONE 2/
3 PRE OUT and ZONE 2/3 L/R speaker terminals.
Digital input sources are not output. If no sound is
heard when an input source is selected, check if it’s
connected to an analog input.
• You cannot select different AM or FM radio stations
for your main room and Zone 2/3. The same AM/FM
radio station will be heard in each room. For example,
if you have an FM station for the main room, that sta-
tion will also be used in Zone 2.
• When you connect Zone 2 speakers directly to the AV
receiver, listening modes that require front high or
front wide speakers such as Dolby Pro Logic IIz
Height or Audyssey Dynamic Surround Expansion™
are unavailable.
Remote
controller
On the remote controller, press
the [ZONE] button repeatedly,
and then press the [MUTING]
button.
To unmute a zone, on the remote
controller, press the [ZONE]
button, and then press the
[MUTING] button again.
Adjusting the Tone and Balance of Zones
• When you connect Zone 3 speakers directly to the AV
receiver, listening modes that require surround back
speakers such as Dolby EX, DTS-ES or THX Ultra2
Cinema are unavailable.
On the AV receiver, press the
1
[ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3] button.
• When the input selector of Zone 2/3 is selected, power
consumption on standby mode slightly increases.
• While Zone 2/3 is on, u functions will not work.
AV receiver
Adjusting the Volume for Zones
Press the AV receiver’s [TONE]
button repeatedly to select
“Bass”, “Treble” or “Balance”.
Remote
controller
2
On the remote controller, press
the [ZONE] button repeatedly,
and then use the VOL [q]/[w]
button.
Use the Up [r] and Down [e]
3
buttons to adjust the bass, treble
or balance.
• You can boost or cut the bass or tre-
ble from –10 dB to +10 dB in 2 dB
steps.
• You can adjust the balance from 0 in
the center to +10 dB to the right or
+10 dB to the left in 2 dB steps.
AV receiver
On the AV receiver, press the
[ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3] button (the
ZONE 2/3 indicator and Zone 2/3
selector on the display flashes)
and press [LEVEL] button
Notes:
• Zones can also be unmuted by adjusting the volume.
• The volume, tone and balance functions cannot be set
when the “Zone2 Out” or “Zone3 Out” setting is set to
“Fixed” (page 135) and “Powered Zone2” or “Pow-
ered Zone3” setting is set to “Not Act” (page 134).
• Even if you repeatedly press the remote controller’s
[ZONE] button to select zones, the last zone selection
will be retained once you have switched to other com-
ponents by pressing other REMOTE MODE buttons
after pressing the [ZONE] button.
followed by the [e]/[r] buttons
within 8 seconds.
137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Multi Zone—Continued
Using a Multiroom Kit with a Cabinet
Using the Remote Controller in Zone
2/3 and Multiroom Control Kits
In this setup, the IR receiver picks up the infrared signals
from the remote controller and feeds them to the AV
receiver located in the cabinet via the connecting block.
To control the AV receiver with the remote controller
while you’re in Zone 2 or Zone 3, you’ll need a commer-
cially available multiroom remote control kit for each
zone.
IR receiver
• Multiroom kits are made by Niles and Xantech.
These kits can also be used when there isn’t a clear line
of sight to the AV receiver’s remote sensor, such as when
it’s installed inside a cabinet.
Connecting
block
IR IN
Using a Multiroom Kit with Zone 2/3
Inside
cabinet
In this setup, the IR receiver in Zone 2/3 picks up the
infrared signals from the remote controller and feeds
them through to the AV receiver in the main room via the
connecting block.
Remote controller
Signal flow
Using a Multiroom Kit with Other
Components
IR IN
IR receiver
Connecting
In this setup, an IR emitter is connected to the AV
receiver’s IR OUT jack and placed in front of the other
component’s remote control sensor. Infrared signals
received at the AV receiver’s IR IN jack are fed through
to the other component via the IR emitter. Signals picked
up by the AV receiver’s remote control sensor are not
output.
block
Remote controller
Main room
Zone 2/3
Signal flow
IR receiver
Connecting
block
The miniplug cable from the connecting block should be
connected to the AV receiver’s IR IN jack, as shown
below.
IR IN
AV receiver
IR OUT
IR Emitter
From the connecting block
Remote controller
Other component
Miniplug cable
Signal flow
The IR emitter should be connected to the AV receiver’s
IR OUT jack, as shown below.
AV receiver
Signal flow
Miniplug cable
Other component
Remote control
sensor
Emitter
Miniplug
IR Emitter
AV receiver
Signal flow
138
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling Other Components
You can use the AV receiver’s remote controller
Looking up for Remote Control Code
(RC-747M) to control your other AV components,
including those made by other manufacturers. This sec-
tion explains how to enter the remote control code for a
component that you want to control: DVD, TV, VCR,
etc.
You can look up for appropriate remote control code
from onscreen setup menu.
This setting can be carried out by using Onscreen Setup
Menu only.
• Learn commands directly from another component’s
remote controller (see page 152).
• Program the ACTIVITIES buttons to perform a
sequence of up to 32 remote control actions (see
page 153).
Press the [RECEIVER] button fol-
1
lowed by the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make
sure the appropriate external input is
selected on your TV.
Preprogrammed Remote Control
Codes
The following REMOTE MODE buttons are prepro-
grammed with remote control codes for controlling the
control code to control these components.
For details on controlling these components, see the
pages indicated.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
2
tons to select “8. Remote Con-
troller Setup”, and then press
[ENTER].
Onkyo DVD player (page 144)
8. Remote Controller Setup
Onkyo CD player (page 147)
1. Remote Mode Setup
2. Activities Setup
Onkyo cassette recorder with u (page 149)
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
3
tons to select “1. Remote Mode
Setup”, and then press [ENTER].
RECEIVER
8–1. Remote Mode Setup
qwer
TV
DVD/BD
VCR/DVR
CBL/SAT
GAME
AUX 1
ENTER
SETUP
AUX 2
TV/TAPE
CD
PHONO
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
4
tons to select remote mode, and
then press [ENTER].
The category selection menu appears.
8–1. Remote Mode Setup
TV
TV
TV/DVD
TV/VCR
139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling Other Components—Continued
To use the remote controller, point it at
the AV receiver’s remote control sen-
sor, as shown below.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
5
tons to select category, and then
press [ENTER].
The brand name input panel appears.
Transmitter
AV receiver
8–1. Remote Mode Setup
Category
TV
Incoming sensor
TV
Brand
15
15
A
B
O
2
C
P
3
D
Q
4
E
R
5
F
S
6
G
T
7
H
U
8
I
J
W
0
K
X
–
L
M
Z
N
1
V
9
Y
&
Approx.
15° off center
(Left/Right/Up/Down)
@
Space
Back Space
Search
16ft. (5 m)
On the remote controller press the
[ENTER] button.
Use the arrow [q]/[w]/[e]/[r] but-
tons to select a character, and
then press [ENTER].
6
8–1. Remote Mode Setup
Category
TV
TV
XXXXX
Brand
Repeat this step from the 1st character
to the 3rd character of the brand name.
When you have entered the 3rd charac-
ter, select “Search” and press
[ENTER].
Wait
When the transfer is successful, the fol-
lowing screen appears. Try it.
After searching, a list of the brand
name appears.
8–1. Remote Mode Setup
TV
Category
Brand
TV
XXXXX
8–1. Remote Mode Setup
TV
1. Push remote Mode [TV].
Category
Brand
TV
SON
2. Push some key to see if the TV responds.
3. Push remote Mode [RECEIVER].
4. Choose “Works” or “Doesn’t work”.
Sonawa
Sonber
Songba
Sonic
Works
Doesn’t work (try next Code)
Soniko
* When category other than TV have been
Not Listed
selected, the content is different.
If the brand name is not found:
If you can control component,
press the [RECEIVER] button,
use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “Works”, and then
press [ENTER].
8
Use the Right [r] button to select
“Not Listed”, and then press
[ENTER].
The brand name input panel appears.
The “Remote Mode Setup” menu
appears.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select brand, and then
press [ENTER].
7
After searching is completed, a mes-
sage for remote control code transfer
will appear.
If you cannot control component,
use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select “Doesn’t work (try
next Code)” and press [ENTER].
The next code is appear.
8–1. Remote Mode Setup
TV
Category
Brand
TV
XXXXX
Now we are ready to transfer data to Remote
Please hold remote so that it is facing the receiver.
Use ENTER button of your remote to activate “OK”.
Ready?
When you’ve finished, press the
[SETUP] button.
The setup menu closes.
9
OK
140
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling Other Components—Continued
Entering Remote Control Codes
Look up the appropriate remote
control code in the separate
Remote Control Codes list.
The codes are organized by category
(e.g., DVD player, TV, etc.).
1
You’ll need to enter a code for each component that you
want to control.
DISPLAY
While holding down the REMOTE
MODE button to which you want
to enter a code, press and hold
down the [DISPLAY] button
(about 3 seconds).
2
REMOTE
MODE
The REMOTE MODE button lights up.
Notes:
• Remote control codes cannot be
entered for the [RECEIVER] and
[ZONE] buttons.
• Only TV remote control codes can be
entered for the [TV] button.
• Except for the [RECEIVER], [TV],
codes from any category can be
entered for the REMOTE MODE
buttons. However, these buttons also
work as input selector buttons
(page 67), so choose a REMOTE
MODE button that corresponds with
the input to which you connect your
component. For example, if you con-
nect your CD player to the CD input,
choose the [CD] button when enter-
ing its remote control code.
(3 seconds)
Number
buttons
Within 30 seconds, use the num-
ber buttons to enter the 5-digit
remote control code.
3
The REMOTE MODE button flashes
twice.
If the remote control code is not entered
successfully, the REMOTE MODE
button will flash once slowly.
Note:
The remote control codes provided are correct at the time
of printing, but are subject to change.
141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling Other Components—Continued
Remote Control Codes for Onkyo
Resetting REMOTE MODE Buttons
Components Connected via u
You can reset a REMOTE MODE button to its default
remote control code.
Onkyo components that are connected via u are con-
trolled by pointing the remote controller at the AV
receiver, not the component. This allows you to control
While holding down the REMOTE
1
MODE button that you want to
reset, press and hold down the
[AUDIO] button until the REMOTE
MODE button lights up (about 3
seconds).
Make sure the Onkyo component is con-
1
nected with an u cable and an analog
audio cable (RCA).
See page 47 for details.
Enter the appropriate remote control code
for the REMOTE MODE button.
2
• [DVD/BD] button
31612: Onkyo DVD player with u
• [CD] button
71327: Onkyo CD player with u
• [TV/TAPE] button
(3 seconds)
42157: Onkyo cassette recorder with u
Within 30 seconds, press the
(default)
2
• [PORT] button
82351: Onkyo Dock (default)
See the previous page for how to enter remote
REMOTE MODE button again.
The REMOTE MODE button flashes
twice, indicating that the button has
been reset.
control codes.
Each of the REMOTE MODE buttons
is preprogrammed with a remote con-
trol code. When a button is reset, its
preprogrammed code is restored.
Press the REMOTE MODE button, point
the remote controller at the AV receiver,
and operate the component.
3
Note:
If you want to control an Onkyo component by pointing
the remote controller directly at it, or you want to control
an Onkyo component that’s not connected via u, use
the following remote control codes:
The learning command is also reset.
Resetting the Remote Controller
• [DVD/BD] button
You can reset the remote controller to its default settings.
30627: Onkyo DVD player without u (default)
• [CD] button
While holding down the
1
71817: Onkyo CD player without u (default)
[RECEIVER] button, press and
hold down the [AUDIO] button
until the [RECEIVER] button
lights up (about 3 seconds).
• [TV] button
11807: TV with
(default)
If you want to control an Onkyo component by pointing
the remote controller directly at it, use the following
remote control codes:
32900: Onkyo BD player
32901: Onkyo HD DVD player
70868: Onkyo MD recorder
71323: Onkyo CD recorder
(3 seconds)
Within 30 seconds, press the
Note:
2
If you connect an u-capable Onkyo RI Dock to the
TV/TAPE, VCR/DVR, or GAME jacks, for u to work
properly, you must set the Input Display accordingly
(see page 60).
[RECEIVER] button again.
The [RECEIVER] button flashes twice,
indicating that the remote controller
has been reset.
142
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling Other Components—Continued
Controlling a TV
By pressing the [TV] button that’s been programmed
with the remote control code for TV, you can control
your TV with the following buttons.
For details on entering a remote control code for a differ-
ent component, see page 141.
a ON, STANDBY, TV [9] buttons
Set the TV to On or Standby.
b TV VOL [q]/[w] button
Adjust the TV’s volume.
c TV [INPUT] button
The [TV] button is preprogrammed with the remote con-
trol code for controlling a TV that supports the
Selects the TV’s external inputs.
*1
d GUIDE button
(limited to some models). The TV must be
Displays the program guide.
able to receive remote control commands via
and be connected to the AV receiver via HDMI. If con-
e Arrow [q]/[w]/[e]/[r] and ENTER buttons
trolling your TV via
doesn’t work very well,
Used to navigate menus and select items.
program your TV’s remote control code into the [TV]
button and use the TV remote mode to control your TV.
f SETUP button
Displays a menu.
g [1], [3], [2], [5], [4], [7], [6]
Press [TV] button first.
buttons*
Play, Pause, Stop, Fast reverse, Fast forward, Previ-
ous, and Next.
These buttons works for combination devices.
a
j
h SEARCH, REPEAT, RANDOM, and PLAY
MODE buttons
Function as colored buttons or A, B, C, D buttons.
i Number buttons
Enter numbers. 0 button enters 11 on some compo-
nents. +10 button* works as “--/---” button or +10.
k
l
j DISPLAY button
a
b
c
d
e
Displays information.
k MUTING button
Mutes the TV.
m
l CH +/– button
Select channels on the TV.
m PREV CH button
f
n
o
Selects the previous or last channel.
n RETURN button
Exits the TV’s setup menu.
o AUDIO button*
g
h
Selects foreign language soundtracks and audio for-
mats (e.g., Dolby Digital or DTS).
p CLR button
Cancels functions and clears entered numbers, or
enters 12.
i
Notes:
• With some components, certain buttons may not work
as expected, and some may not work at all.
• Buttons marked with an asterisk (*) are not supported
p
by the
function.
*1 The
supported by the AV receiver is the CEC
system control function of the HDMI standard.
143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling Other Components—Continued
Controlling a DVD Player or DVD Recorder
*2 When you want to change the remote controller mode without
By pressing the REMOTE MODE button that’s been
programmed with the remote control code for your DVD
player (HD DVD, Blu-ray, or TV/DVD combination),
you can control your player with the following buttons.
The [DVD/BD] button is preprogrammed with the
remote control code for controlling an Onkyo DVD
player.
changing the current input source, press the [MODE] button and
within about eight seconds, press the REMOTE MODE button.
Then, with the AV receiver’s remote controller, you can control
the component corresponding to the button you pressed.
a ON, STANDBY buttons
Sets the DVD player to On or Standby.
For details on entering a remote control code for a differ-
ent component, see page 141.
The [DVD/BD] button is preprogrammed with the
b TV [9] button
Set the TV to On or Standby.
c TV [INPUT] button
remote control code for controlling a component that
Selects the TV’s external inputs.
*1
supports the
. The component must be able to
and be
connected to the AV receiver via HDMI. If controlling
your component via doesn’t work very well,
d TV VOL [q]/[w] button
receive remote control commands via
Adjust the TV’s volume.
e TOP MENU button
program your component’s remote control code into the
[DVD/BD] button and use the DVD/BD remote mode to
control your component.
Displays a DVD’s top menu or a DVD’s title.
f Arrow [q]/[w]/[e]/[r] and ENTER buttons
Used to navigate menus and select items.
Press the appropriate
REMOTE MODE button first.
g SETUP button
Used to access the DVD player’s settings.
h [1], [3], [2], [5], [4], [7], [6]
buttons
Play, Pause, Stop, Fast reverse, Fast forward, Previ-
ous, and Next.
a
l
i REPEAT button
Used with the repeat playback functions.
j SEARCH button*
Used to search title, chapter, and track numbers, and
to search times for locating specific points.
m
n
*2
k Number buttons
b
c
d
e
f
Used to enter title, chapter, and track numbers, and
to enter times for locating specific points. The [+10]
o
l DISPLAY button
p
Displays information about the current disc, title,
chapter, or track, including elapsed time, remaining
time, total time, and so on.
g
q
r
m MUTING button (69)
Mutes or unmutes the AV receiver.
n CH +/–, DISC +/– button
Selects discs on a DVD changer. Selects TV chan-
nels on a component with a built-in tuner.
h
o VOL [q]/[w] button (67)
Adjusts the volume of the AV receiver.
i
j
s
t
p MENU button
Displays a DVD’s menu.
q RETURN button
k
Exits the DVD player’s setup menu or returns to the
previous menu.
r AUDIO button*
u
Selects foreign language soundtracks and audio for-
mats (e.g., Dolby Digital or DTS).
s RANDOM button*
*1 The
supported by the AV receiver is the CEC system
Used with the random playback function.
control function of the HDMI standard.
144
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling Other Components—Continued
• If you enter the remote control code for a HD DVD or
t PLAY MODE button*
Selects play modes on components with selectable
play modes.
Blu-ray player that has A, B, C, and D or colored but-
tons, the [SEARCH], [REPEAT], [RANDOM], and
[PLAY MODE] buttons will work as colored or A, B,
C, D buttons. In this case, these buttons cannot be used
to set repeat playback, random playback, or select play
modes.
u CLR button
Cancels functions and clears entered numbers.
Notes:
• With some components, certain buttons may not work
as expected, and some may not work at all.
• Buttons marked with an asterisk (*) are not supported
by the
function.
Controlling a VCR or PVR
By pressing the REMOTE MODE button that’s been
(TV/VCR, PVR, DBS/PVR combination or cable/PVR
combination), you can control your video recorder with
the following buttons.
For details on entering a remote control code for a differ-
ent component, see page 141.
a ON, STANDBY buttons
Set the video recorder to On or Standby.
b TV [9] button
Set the TV to On or Standby.
c TV [INPUT] button
Selects the TV’s external inputs.
d TV VOL [q]/[w] button
Press the appropriate
REMOTE MODE button first.
Adjust the TV’s volume.
e GUIDE button
Displays the program guide or navigation list.
a
j
f Arrow [q]/[w]/[e]/[r] and ENTER buttons
Used to navigate menus and select items.
g SETUP button
Displays the video recorders setup menu.
h Previous [7] button
Previous or instant replay function.
k
l
*1
i Number buttons
Enter numbers. The [0] button enters 11 on some
components. The [+10] button works as a +10 but-
ton or “--/---” button.
b
c
d
e
f
m
j DISPLAY button
n
Displays information.
k MUTING button (69)
Mutes or unmutes the AV receiver.
g
h
o
l CH +/– button
Selects TV channels on the video recorder.
p
q
m VOL [q]/[w] button (67)
Adjusts the volume of the AV receiver.
n PREV CH button
Selects the previous channel.
o RETURN button
Exits the menu or returns to the previous menu.
p Next [6] button
Next or advance function.
i
q [1], [3], [2], [5], [4] buttons
Play, Pause, Stop, Fast reverse, and Fast forward.
r
r CLR button
Cancels functions or enters the number 12.
*1 When you want to change the remote controller mode without
changing the current input source, press the [MODE] button and
within about eight seconds, press the REMOTE MODE button.
Then, with the AV receiver’s remote controller, you can control
the component corresponding to the button you pressed.
Note:
With some components, certain buttons may not work as
expected, and some may not work at all.
145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling Other Components—Continued
Controlling a Satellite Receiver or Cable Receiver
By pressing the REMOTE MODE button that’s been
ellite receiver, cable receiver, or DVD recorder (DBS/
PVR combination or cable/PVR combination), you can
control your player with the following buttons.
For details on entering a remote control code for a differ-
ent component, see page 141.
a ON, STANDBY buttons
Set the component to On or Standby.
b GUIDE button
Displays the onscreen program guide.
c Arrow [q]/[w]/[e]/[r] and ENTER buttons
Used to navigate menus and select items.
d SETUP button
Press the appropriate
REMOTE MODE button first.
Displays the setup menu.
e SEARCH, REPEAT, RANDOM, and PLAY
MODE buttons
Function as colored buttons or A, B, C, D buttons.
f Number buttons
a
g
Enter numbers. The [+10] button works as a +10
button or “--/---” button.
g DISPLAY button
Displays information.
h MUTING button (69)
h
i
Mutes or unmutes the AV receiver.
i CH +/– button
Selects satellite/cable channels.
j
j VOL [q]/[w] button (67)
Adjusts the volume of the AV receiver.
b
c
k
k PREV CH button
Selects the previous channel.
l RETURN button
d
l
m
Exits the menu.
m AUDIO button
Selects foreign language soundtracks and audio for-
mats (e.g., Dolby Digital or DTS).
n
n [1], [3], [2], [5], [4], [7], [6]
buttons
Play, Pause, Stop, Fast reverse, Fast forward, Previ-
ous, and Next.
e
f
o CLR button
Cancels functions and clears entered numbers.
Note:
With some components, certain buttons may not work as
expected, and some may not work at all.
o
146
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling Other Components—Continued
Controlling a CD Player, CD Recorder or MD Recorder
By pressing the REMOTE MODE button that’s been
programmed with the remote control code for your CD
player, CD recorder, or MD recorder, you can control
your player with the following buttons.
The [CD] button is preprogrammed with the remote con-
trol code for controlling an Onkyo CD player.
For details on entering a remote control code for a differ-
ent component, see page 141.
a ON, STANDBY buttons
Set the component to On or Standby.
b Arrow [q]/[w]/[e]/[r] and ENTER buttons
Used to navigate menus and select items.
c SETUP button
Used to access the Onkyo CD player’s settings.
d [1], [3], [2], [5], [4], [7], [6]
buttons
Press the appropriate
REMOTE MODE button first.
Play, Pause, Stop, Fast reverse, Fast forward, Previ-
ous, and Next.
e REPEAT button
Used with the repeat playback function.
f SEARCH button
a
h
Used to locate specific points.
g Number buttons
Used to enter track numbers and times for locating
specific points. The [+10] button works as a +10
button or “--/---” button.
h DISPLAY button
i
j
Displays information about the current disc or track,
including elapsed time, remaining time, total time,
and so on.
k
i MUTING button (69)
Mutes or unmutes the AV receiver.
j DISC +/– button
b
c
Selects discs on a CD changer.
k VOL [q]/[w] button (67)
Adjusts the volume of the AV receiver.
l RANDOM button
Used with the random playback function.
m PLAY MODE button
d
Selects play modes on components with selectable
play modes.
e
f
l
m
n CLR button
Cancels functions and clears entered numbers.
Note:
g
With some components, certain buttons may not work as
expected, and some may not work at all.
n
147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling Other Components—Continued
Controlling an RI Dock
By pressing the REMOTE MODE button that’s been
programmed with the remote control code for your
Dock, you can control your iPod in the Dock with the
following buttons.
a ON, STANDBY buttons
Turns the iPod on or off.
Notes:
DS-A2X RI Dock on or off.
For some RI docks, the [ON], [STANDBY] button may
(without u).
• Your iPod may not respond the first time you press this
button, in which case you should press it again. This is
because the remote controller transmits the On and
Standby commands alternately, so if your iPod is
already on, it will remain on when the remote control-
ler transmits an On command. Similarly, if your iPod
is already off, it will remain off when the remote con-
troller transmits an Off command.
In this case, make an u connection and enter a remote
control code 81993 (with u).
For details on entering a remote control code, see
page 141.
When Using an RI Dock:
• When using the Onkyo DS-A3 RI Dock, make an u
connection and enter a remote control code 81993
b TOP MENU button
Works as a Mode button when used with a DS-A2
RI Dock.
IN, or GAME IN L/R jacks.
c Arrow [q]/[w] and ENTER buttons
• Set the RI Dock’s RI MODE switch to HDD or HDD/
DOCK.
• Set the AV receiver’s Input Display to DOCK (see
page 60).
• See to the Dock’s instruction manual for more infor-
mation.
Used to navigate menus and select items.
d Previous [7] button
Restarts the current song. Press it twice to select the
previous song.
e Fast Reverse [5] button
Press and hold to fast reverse.
Press the appropriate
REMOTE MODE button first.
f Pause [3] button
Pauses playback.
g REPEAT button
a
Used with the repeat function.
h
h DISPLAY button
Turns on the backlight for 30 seconds.
i MUTING button (69)
Mutes or unmutes the AV receiver.
j ALBUM +/– button
i
j
Selects the next or previous album.
k VOL [q]/[w] button (67)
Adjusts the volume of the AV receiver.
k
l MENU button
Exits the menu.
l
b
c
m PLAYLIST [e]/[r] button
Selects the previous or next playlist on the iPod.
n Play [1] button
m
Starts playback. If the component is off, it will turn
on automatically.
n
o
o Next [6] button
d
Selects the next song.
e
f
p
q
r
s
p Fast Forward [4] button
Press and hold to fast forward.
q Stop [2] button
Stops playback and displays a menu.
g
148
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling Other Components—Continued
r PLAY MODE button
s RANDOM button
Used with the shuffle function.
Note:
With some components, certain buttons may not work as
expected, and some may not work at all.
Selects play modes on components with selectable
play modes.
Works as a Resume button when used with a DS-A2
RI Dock.
Controlling a Cassette Recorder
By pressing the REMOTE MODE button that’s been
programmed with the remote control code for your cas-
sette recorder, you can control your cassette recorder
with the following buttons.
The [TV/TAPE] button is preprogrammed with the
remote control code for controlling an Onkyo cassette
recorder when used with an u connection.
For details on entering a remote control code for a differ-
ent component, see page 141.
On twin cassette decks, only Deck B can be controlled.
a ON, STANDBY buttons
Turns the cassette recorder on or off.
b Previous and Next [7]/[6] buttons
The Previous [7] button selects the previous
track. During playback it selects the beginning of
the current track. The Next [6] button selects the
next track.
Depending on how they were recorded, the Previous
and Next [7]/[6] buttons may not work prop-
erly with some cassette tapes.
Press the appropriate
REMOTE MODE button first.
c Fast Reverse and Fast Forward [5]/[4]
buttons
The Fast Reverse [5] button starts fast reverse.
The Fast Forward [4] button starts fast forward.
a
d Reverse Play [t] button
Starts reverse playback.
e Play [1] button
Starts playback.
f MUTING button (69)
f
g
Mutes or unmutes the AV receiver.
g VOL [q]/[w] button (67)
Adjusts the volume of the AV receiver.
h Stop [2] button
Stops playback.
Notes:
• An Onkyo cassette recorder connected via u can
also be controlled in Receiver mode.
• With some components, certain buttons may not work
as expected, and some may not work at all.
b
c
b
c
h
d
e
149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling Other Components—Continued
Activities Setup
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
tons to select an item, and use
the Left and Right [e]/[r] but-
tons to change the settings.
The items are explained below.
5
Via onscreen menu, you can specify what actions will be
taken by the Easy macro command in the Easy macro
mode.
8–2. Activities Setup
MY Movie
Press the [RECEIVER] button fol-
1
Source
TV Power ON
Source Power ON
Receiver Power ON
Receiver Source Change
Source Play
DVD/BD
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
lowed by the [SETUP] button.
The main menu appears onscreen.
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make
sure the appropriate external input is
selected on your TV.
Source
DVD/BD, VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT,
GAME, AUX 1, AUX 2, TV/
TAPE, TUNER, CD, PHONO,
PORT, NET/USB
With this setting, you can choose
the input source.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
2
tons to select “8. Remote Con-
troller Setup”, and then press
[ENTER].
TV Power On
Enable: TV to turn on “Enable”.
Disable: TV to turn on “Disable”.
This option enables the TV to turn
on when the ACTIVITIES button is
pressed.
The “Remote Controller Setup” menu
appears.
8. Remote Controller Setup
Source Power On
1. Remote Mode Setup
2. Activities Setup
Enable: Source to turn on
“Enable”.
Disable: Source to turn on
“Disable”.
This option enables the Source to
turn on when the ACTIVITIES but-
ton is pressed.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
3
tons to select “2. Activities
Setup”, and then press [ENTER].
Receiver Power On
Enable: AV receiver to turn on
“Enable”.
Disable: AV receiver to turn on
“Disable”.
The “Activities Setup” menu appears.
8–2. Activities Setup
My Movie
My TV
My Music
This option enables the AV receiver
to turn on when the ACTIVITIES
button is pressed.
Receiver Source Change
Enable: AV receiver input
selector is change.
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-
Disable: AV receiver input
selector is not change.
This option enables the AV receiver
input selector to change when the
ACTIVITIES button is pressed.
4
tons to select “My Movie”, “My
TV”, or “My Music”, and then
press [ENTER].
MyMovie: Actions for the
[MY MOVIE] button is
changed.
MyTV: Actions for the [MY TV]
button is changed.
MyMusic: Actions for the
[MY MUSIC] button is
changed.
150
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling Other Components—Continued
Source Play
On the remote controller press
the [ENTER] button.
7
Enable: Start playback the source
of “Enable”.
8–2. Activities Setup
My Movie
Disable: Start playback the source
of “Disable”.
This option enables the Source to
start playback when the ACTIVI-
TIES button is pressed.
Wait
Here are the default settings.
Default Settings
Items
When the transfer is successful, the fol-
lowing screen appears.
My
My
My TV
Movie
Music
8–2. Activities Setup
My Movie
Source
DVD
CBL
CD
TV Power On
Source Power On
Receiver Power On
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Disable
Enable
Enable
Successful
Return
Receiver Source
Change
Enable
Enable
Enable
Disable
Enable
Enable
When you’ve finished, press the
[ENTER] button.
The “8-2. Activities Setup” menu
appears onscreen.
8
9
Source Play
Press [ENTER].
A message for transfer will appear.
6
When you’ve finished, press the
[SETUP] button.
8–2. Activities Setup
My Movie
The setup menu closes.
Now we are ready to transfer data to Remote
Please hold remote so that it is facing the receiver.
Use ENTER button of your remote to activate “OK”.
Ready?
OK
To use the remote controller, point it at
the AV receiver’s remote control sen-
sor, as shown below.
Transmitter
AV receiver
Incoming sensor
15
15
Approx.
15° off center
16ft. (5 m)
(Left/Right/Up/Down)
151
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling Other Components—Continued
If the command is learned successfully,
the REMOTE MODE button flashes
twice.
Learning Commands
The AV receiver’s remote controller can learn the com-
mands of other remote controllers. By transmitting, for
remote controller, the remote controller can learn it, and
then transmit the exact same command when its Play
[1] button is pressed in the CD remote mode.
This is useful when you’ve entered the appropriate
remote control code (page 141) but some buttons don’t
work as expected.
E
M
U
L
V O
I N G
E
N
E S T T O
T
C H S E L
E S E T
P R
E R
C
D
V D
D
T U N
T I - C H
I N U T
M U L
P H O N O
O R
O U
G R
T
E R
L E C
M O D E
S U R
N
D
D I S C
T
About 2 to 6
C
M E
D I M
V I D E O - 2
I N P U
A P
T
V I D E O - 1
D
S L E E P
D
inches (5 to 15 cm)
E R
O W
P
Supplied remote
controller
(RC-747M)
ON
To learn more commands, repeat
steps 2 and 3.
Press any REMOTE MODE button
when you’ve finished. The REMOTE
MODE button flashes twice.
4
REMOTE
MODE
Notes:
• The following buttons cannot learn new commands:
REMOTE MODE, ACTIVITIES [ALL OFF],
[MY MOVIE], [MY TV], [MY MUSIC].
• The remote controller can learn approximately 70 to
90 commands, although this will be less if commands
that use a lot of memory are learned.
and so on are preprogrammed with commands for
controlling Onkyo CD players, cassette decks, and
DVD players. However, they can learn new com-
mands, and you can restore the preprogrammed com-
mands at any time by resetting the remote controller
(see page 142).
While holding down the REMOTE
MODE button for the mode in
which you want to use the com-
mand, press and hold down the
[ON] button until the REMOTE
MODE button lights up (about 3
seconds).
1
• To overwrite a previously learned command, repeat
this procedure.
• Depending on the remote controller that you are using,
there may be some buttons that won’t work as
expected, or even some remotes that cannot be learned
at all.
• Only commands from infrared remote controllers can
(3 seconds)
be learned.
• When the remote controller’s batteries expire, all
learned commands will be lost and will have to be
learned all over again, so don’t discard your other
remote controllers.
On the supplied remote control-
ler, press the button you want to
learn the new command.
2
3
Point the remote controllers at
each other, about 2 to 6 inches (5
to 15 cm) apart, and then press
and hold the button whose com-
mand you want to learn until the
REMOTE MODE button flashes.
■ Deleting Learning Commands
1. While holding down the REMOTE MODE button
for the mode in which you want to delete the com-
mand, press and hold down the TV [9] button
until the REMOTE MODE button lights up (about 3
seconds).
2. Press the REMOTE MODE button or the button
from which you want to delete the commands.
The REMOTE MODE button flashes twice.
When you press the REMOTE MODE button, all
commands learned in that remote mode will be
deleted.
152
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling Other Components—Continued
Using Normal Macros
When you’ve finished, press the
ACTIVITIES button again.
The ACTIVITIES button flashes twice.
If you enter 32 commands, the process
will finish automatically.
3
You can program the remote controller’s ACTIVITIES
buttons to perform a sequence of remote control actions.
Example:
To play a CD you typically need to perform the follow-
ing actions:
1. Press the [RECEIVER] button to select the Receiver
remote controller mode.
Note:
Once you have taught new macro commands, the origi-
nal macro will no longer work. If you want to retrieve
them, you will have to teach again.
2. Press the [ON] button to turn on the AV receiver.
3. Press the [CD] button to select the CD input source.
4. Press the Play [1] button to start playback on the
CD player.
Running Macros
You can program ACTIVITIES buttons so that all four
actions are performed with just one button press.
Press the [MY MOVIE], [MY TV],
or [MY MUSIC] button.
Making Macros
The commands in the macro are trans-
mitted in the order in which they were
programmed. Keep the remote control-
ler pointed at the AV receiver until all
of the commands have been transmit-
ted.
Each ACTIVITIES button can store one macro, and each
macro can contain up to 32 commands.
Macros can be run at any time, regard-
less of the current remote controller
mode.
ALL OFF
MY MOVIE,
MY TV,
MY MUSIC
RECEIVER
Deleting Macros
While holding down the [AUDIO]
1
button, press and hold down the
[ALL OFF] button until the [ALL
OFF] button lights up (about 3
seconds).
While holding down the
1
[RECEIVER] button, press and
hold down the [MY MOVIE], [MY
TV], or [MY MUSIC] button until
the [MY MOVIE], [MY TV], or
[MY MUSIC] button lights up
(about 3 seconds).
(3 seconds)
(3 seconds)
Press the [ALL OFF] button
again.
The [ALL OFF] button flashes twice.
2
Press the buttons whose actions
you want to program into the
macro in the order you want them
performed.
2
Notes:
• All of the ACTIVITIES buttons will
automatically switch to the Easy
macro mode when the macro is
deleted (page 72).
• When you using Normal macro
mode, you cannot use the easy macro
command including the change of
the source component.
For the CD example above, you’d press
the following buttons: [ON], [CD],
Play [1].
Note:
The [MODE] button is invalid at macro
making operation.
153
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
If you have any trouble using the AV receiver, look for a
solution in this section. If you can’t resolve the issue
yourself, contact your Onkyo dealer.
designed for home theater enjoyment. It has a wide
volume range, allowing precise adjustment.
press the remote controller’s [MUTING] button to
unmute the AV receiver (page 69).
• While a pair of headphones is connected to the
PHONES jack, no sound is output by the speakers
(page 70).
• If there’s no sound from a DVD player connected to an
HDMI IN, check the DVD player’s output settings,
and be sure to select a supported audio format.
• Check the digital audio output setting on the con-
nected device. On some game consoles, such as those
that support DVD, the default setting is off.
• With some DVD-Video discs, you need to select an
audio output format from a menu.
• Make sure that none of the connecting cables are bent,
twisted, or damaged.
If you can’t resolve the issue yourself, try resetting
the AV receiver before contacting your Onkyo
dealer.
To reset the AV receiver to its factory defaults,
turn it on and, while holding down the [VCR/DVR]
button, press the [ON/STANDBY] button. “Clear”
will appear on the display and the AV receiver will
enter Standby mode.
Note that resetting the AV receiver will delete your
radio presets and custom settings.
Power
• Not all listening modes use all speakers (page 89).
individual speaker levels (page 97).
• Make sure that the speaker setup microphone is not
still connected.
Can’t turn on the AV receiver
• Make sure that the power cord is properly plugged into
the wall outlet.
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, wait five
seconds or more, then plug it in again.
• The input signal format is set to PCM or DTS. Set it to
Auto (page 116).
The AV receiver turns off as soon as it’s turned
on
Only the front speakers produce sound
listening mode is selected, only the front speakers and
subwoofer produce sound.
• In the Mono listening mode, only the front speakers
output sound if the “Output Speaker” setting is set to
“Left / Right” (page 100).
• The amp protection circuit has been activated.
Remove the power cord from the wall outlet immedi-
ately. Disconnect all speaker cables and input sources,
and leave the AV receiver with its power cord discon-
nected for 1 hour. After that, reconnect the power cord
and set the volume to maximum. If the AV receiver
stays on, set the volume to minimum, disconnect the
power cord, and reconnect your speakers and input
sources. If the AV receiver turns off when you set the
volume to maximum, disconnect the power cord, and
contact your Onkyo dealer.
• Check the Speaker Configuration (page 95).
Only the center speaker produces sound
• If you use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie, Dolby Pro
Logic IIx Music, or Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game listen-
station or mono TV program, the sound is concen-
• In the Mono listening mode, only the front speakers
output sound if the “Output Speaker” setting is set to
“Center” (page 100).
Audio
There’s no sound, or it’s very quiet
properly (page 56).
• Make sure that all audio connecting plugs are pushed
in all the way (page 29).
• Make sure the speakers are configured correctly
(page 95).
• Make sure that the inputs and outputs of all compo-
• Make sure that the polarity of the speaker cables is
correct, and that the bare wires are in contact with the
• Make sure that the input source is properly selected
(page 67).
• Make sure that the speaker cables are not shorting.
• Check the volume. It can be set to −Q dB, −81.5 dB
through +18.0 dB (page 67). The AV receiver is
154
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting—Continued
The surround speakers produce no sound
• When the DTS Surround Sensation, T-D (Theater-
Dimensional), Stereo or Mono listening mode is
selected, the surround speakers produce no sound.
• Depending on the source and current listening mode,
not much sound may be produced by the surround
speakers. Try selecting another listening mode.
• Make sure the speakers are configured correctly
(page 95).
There’s no sound with a certain signal format
• Check the digital audio output setting on the con-
nected device. On some game consoles, such as those
that support DVD, the default setting is off.
• With some DVD-Video discs, you need to select an
audio output format from a menu.
• Depending on the input signal, some listening modes
cannot be selected (pages 82 to 88).
Can’t get 6.2/7.2 playback
The center speaker produces no sound
mode is selected, the center speaker produces no
sound.
• In the Mono listening mode, only the front speakers
output sound if the “Output Speaker” setting is set to
“Left / Right” (page 100).
ers are connected, or the Zone 2/3 speakers are being
used, 6.2/7.2 playback is not possible.
• You can not always select all of the listening modes,
depending on the number of the speakers connected
(pages 82 to 88).
The speaker volume cannot be set as required
(The volume cannot be set to +18.0 dB)
• Check to see if a maximum volume has been set
(page 110).
• Make sure the speakers are configured correctly
(page 95).
speakers produce no sound
• Depending on the current listening mode, no sound
may be produced by the front high, front wide, and
surround back speakers. Select another listening mode
(page 89).
• If the volume level of each individual speaker has been
adjusted to high positive values (page 97), then the
maximum master volume possible may be reduced.
Note that the individual speaker volume levels are set
®
automatically after Audyssey MultEQ XT Room
Correction and Speaker Setup has been completed
(page 62).
• Not much sound may be produced by the front high,
front wide, and surround back speakers with some
sources.
Noise can be heard
(page 95).
• While Powered Zone 2 is being used, playback in the
main room is reduced to 7.2-channels and the front
high and front wide speakers produce no sound
(page 130).
• While Powered Zone 3 is being used, playback in the
main room is reduced to 7.2-channels and the sur-
round back speakers produce no sound (page 130).
• Using cable ties to bundle audio cables with power
cords, speaker cables, and so on may degrade the
audio performance, so don’t do it.
• An audio cable may be picking up interference. Try
repositioning your cables.
The Late Night function doesn’t work
Digital Plus, and Dolby TrueHD (page 117).
• Check the multichannel input connections (page 37).
• Make sure that the multichannel input is assigned to
the input selector (page 57).
• Make sure that the multichannel input is selected
(page 80).
• When you play source material that contains no infor-
mation in the LFE channel, the subwoofer may pro-
duce no sound.
• Make sure the speakers are configured correctly
(page 95).
• Check the audio output settings on your source com-
ponent.
The Zone 2/3 speakers produce no sound
connected to an analog input. Check to see if the
source component is connected to an analog input.
Type(FrontB)” is set to “Normal”, “Bi-Amp”, or
“BTL” (pages 57 and 131).
• Powered Zone3 cannot be used if “Speakers
Type(FrontA)” or “Speakers Type(FrontB)” is set to
“Bi-Amp” or “BTL” (pages 57 and 133).
About DTS signals
• When DTS program material ends and the DTS bit-
stream stops, the AV receiver remains in DTS listen-
ing mode and the DTS indicator remains on. This is to
prevent noise when you use the pause, fast forward, or
fast reverse function on your player. If you switch your
player from DTS to PCM, because the AV receiver
does not switch formats immediately, you may not
hear any sound, in which case you should stop your
player for about three seconds, and then resume play-
back.
155
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting—Continued
• With some CD and LD players, you won’t be able to
playback DTS material properly even though your
player is connected to a digital input on the AV
receiver. This is usually because the DTS bitstream
has been processed (e.g., output level, sampling rate,
or frequency response changed) and the AV receiver
doesn’t recognize it as a genuine DTS signal. In such
cases, you may hear noise.
• When playing DTS program material, using the pause,
fast forward, or fast reverse function on your player
may produce a short audible noise. This is not a mal-
function.
There’s no picture from a source connected to
an HDMI IN
not guaranteed. In addition, video signals from a PC
are not guaranteed (page 31).
• When the “Monitor Out” setting is set to “Analog”,
and the “Resolution” setting is set to anything other
than “Through” (page 53), no video is output by the
HDMI outputs.
• When the “Resolution” (page 53) is set to any resolu-
tion not supported by the TV, no video is output by the
HDMI outputs.
• If the message “Resolution Error” appears on the AV
receiver’s display, this indicates that your TV does not
support the current video resolution and you need to
select another resolution on your DVD player.
The beginning of audio received by an HDMI IN
can’t be heard
• Since it takes longer to identify the format of an
HDMI signal than it does for other digital audio sig-
• If your TV is connected to the analog outputs, set the
“Monitor Out” setting to “Analog” (page 52).
• (European and Asian models) Specify the TV sys-
tem used in your area in the “TV Format Setup” on
page 59.
Video
There’s no picture
• Make sure that all video connecting plugs are pushed
in all the way (page 29).
the AV receiver is connected is selected.
The picture is distorted
tem used in your area in the “TV Format Setup” on
page 59.
nected (pages 31 to 46).
• If your TV is connected to the HDMI output, set the
“Monitor Out” setting other than “Analog” (page 52),
and select “- - - - -” in the “HDMI Input Setup” on
• If your TV is connected to the COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR OUT, S MONITOR OUT, or V MONI-
TOR OUT, set the “Monitor Out” setting to “Analog”
Video Input Setup” on page 55 to watch composite
video and S-Video sources.
• If the video source is connected to a component video
input, you must assign that input to an input selector
TOR OUT (pages 31 and 35).
The immediate display does not appear
• If you select other than “Analog” in the “Monitor Out”
setting (page 52), the immediate display will not
appear when the input signal from the COMPONENT
VIDEO IN is output to a device connected to the
COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT.
• Depending on the input signal, the immediate display
may not appear when the input signal from the HDMI
input is output to a device connected to the HDMI out-
put.
Tuner
• If the video source is connected to an HDMI input,
you must assign that input to an input selector
(page 54), and your TV must be connected to the
HDMI outputs (page 31).
• While the Pure Audio listening mode is selected, the
video circuitry is turned off and only video signals
input through HDMI IN can be output.
Reception is noisy, FM stereo reception is
noisy, or the FM STEREO indicator doesn’t
appear
• Relocate your antenna.
• Move the AV receiver away from your TV or com-
puter.
• Listen to the station in mono (page 73).
• When listening to an AM station, operating the remote
controller may cause noise.
• Passing cars and airplanes can cause interference.
• Concrete walls weaken radio signals.
• If nothing improves the reception, install an outdoor
antenna.
• On your TV, make sure that the video input to which
• If you selected “Both (Main)” or “Both (Sub)” in the
“Monitor Out” setting, no picture may appear on your
TV that is connected to a secondary HDMI output (not
a priority HDMI output). In this case, change the set-
ting to “Both” (page 52).
156
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting—Continued
• The entered remote control code may not be correct. If
more than one code is listed, try each one.
Remote Controller
The remote controller doesn’t work
• Make sure that the batteries are installed with the cor-
rect polarity (page 14).
Can’t learn commands from another remote
controller
• When learning commands, make sure that the trans-
mitting ends of both remote controllers are pointing at
each other.
• Are you trying to learn from a remote controller that
cannot be used for learning? Some commands cannot
be learned, especially those that contain several
instructions.
teries, or old and new batteries (page 14).
• Make sure that the remote controller is not too far
away from the AV receiver, and that there’s no
obstruction between the remote controller and the AV
receiver’s remote control sensor (page 14).
• Make sure that the AV receiver is not subjected to
direct sunshine or inverter-type fluorescent lights.
Relocate if necessary.
• If the AV receiver is installed in a rack or cabinet with
colored-glass doors, the remote controller may not
work reliably when the doors are closed.
• Make sure you’ve selected the correct remote control-
Dock for iPod
There’s no sound
• Make sure your iPod is actually playing.
• Make sure your iPod is inserted properly in the Dock.
• Make sure the UP-A1 Dock is connected to the UNI-
VERSAL PORT jack on the AV receiver.
• Make sure the AV receiver is turned on, the correct
input source is selected, and the volume is turned up.
• Make sure the plugs are pushed in all the way.
• Try resetting your iPod.
• When using the remote controller to control other
not work as expected.
• Make sure you’ve entered the correct remote control
code (page 141).
There’s no video
• Make sure to set the same ID on both the AV receiver
and remote controller (page 112).
• Make sure that your iPod’s TV OUT setting is set to
On.
• Make sure the correct input is selected on your TV or
the AV receiver.
• Some versions of the iPod do not output video.
• If it’s an Onkyo component, make sure that the u
cable and analog audio cable are connected properly.
Connecting only an u cable won’t work (page 47).
• Make sure you’ve selected the correct remote control-
ler mode (pages 15 and 143 to 149).
recorder, CD recorder, RI Dock to the TV/TAPE IN/
OUT jacks, or an RI Dock to the GAME IN or VCR/
DVR IN jacks, for the remote controller to work prop-
erly, you must set the display to MD, CDR, or DOCK
(page 60).
The AV receiver’s remote controller doesn’t
control your iPod
• Make sure your iPod is properly inserted in the Dock.
If your iPod is in a case, it may not connect properly
to the Dock. Always remove your iPod from the case
before inserting it into the Dock.
• The iPod cannot be operated while it’s displaying the
Apple logo.
• Make sure you’ve selected the right remote mode.
• When you use the AV receiver’s remote controller,
point it toward your amp.
If you cannot operate it, you will need to enter the
• To control another manufacturer’s component, point
the remote controller at that component.
• If you still can’t control your iPod, start playback by
pressing your iPod’s Play button. Remote operation
should then be possible.
• If none of the codes work, use the Learning function
to learn the commands of the other component’s
remote controller (page 152).
• Try resetting your iPod.
• Depending on your iPod, some buttons may not work
as expected.
work as expected, and some may not work at all.
• To control an Onkyo component that’s connected via
u, point the remote controller at the AV receiver. Be
sure to enter the appropriate remote control code first
(page 142).
• To control an Onkyo component that’s not connected
via u, or another manufacturer’s component, point
the remote controller at the component. Be sure to
enter the appropriate remote control code first
(page 141).
• You can’t control your iPod if the battery is extremely
low. Use the iPod after recharging for a while.
The AV receiver unexpectedly selects your iPod
as the input source
• Always pause iPod playback before selecting a differ-
ent input source. If playback is not paused, the Direct
Change function may select your iPod as the input
source by mistake during the transition between
tracks.
157
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting—Continued
Recording
USB Mass Storage Device Playback
Can’t record
• On your recorder, make sure the correct input is
selected.
• To prevent signal loops and damage to the AV
receiver, input signals are not fed through to outputs
with the same name (e.g., TAPE IN to TAPE OUT or
VCR/DVR IN to VCR/DVR OUT).
Can’t access the music files on a USB device
• Make sure the USB device is plugged in properly.
• The AV receiver supports USB devices that support
the USB mass storage device class. However, play-
back may not be possible with some USB devices
even if they conform to the USB mass storage device
class.
• When the Pure Audio listening mode is selected,
recording is not possible because no video signals are
output. Select another listening mode.
• USB memory devices with security functions cannot
be played.
Others
Zone 2/3
The sound changes when I connect my
headphones
• When a pair of headphones is connected, the listening
mode is set to Stereo, unless it’s already set to Stereo,
Mono, Direct, Pure Audio or DTS Surround Sensa-
tion.
There’s no sound
• Only components connected to analog inputs can be
played in Zone 2/3.
Music Server and Internet Radio
The speaker distance cannot be set as required
• In some cases, corrected values suitable for home the-
ater use may be set automatically.
Can’t access the server or Internet radio
receiver and your router or switch.
• Make sure that your modem and router are properly
connected, and make sure they are both turned on.
• Make sure the server is up and running and compatible
The display doesn’t work
ing mode is selected.
How do I change the language of a multiplex
source
• Use the “Multiplex” setting on the “Audio Adjust”
• Check the “Network Settings”(page 126).
Playback stops while listening to music files on
the server
The u functions don’t work
• Make sure your server is compatible with the AV
receiver (page 125).
• To use u, you must make an u connection and an
analog audio connection (RCA) between the compo-
nent and AV receiver, even if they are connected digi-
tally (page 47).
• If you download or copy large files on your computer,
playback may be interrupted. Try closing any unused
programs, use a more powerful computer, or use a
dedicated server.
• If the server is serving large music files to several net-
worked devices simultaneously, the network may
become overloaded and playback may be interrupted.
Reduce the number of playback devices on the net-
work, upgrade your network, or use a switch instead
of a hub.
• While Zone 2 or Zone 3 is selected, the u functions
don’t work.
The functions Auto Power On/Standby and
Direct Change don’t work for components
connected via u
• These functions don’t work when Zone 2/3 is turned
on.
Can’t connect to the AV receiver from a Web
browser
allocate the same IP address to the AV receiver, so if
you find that you can’t connect to a server or Internet
radio station, recheck the AV receiver’s IP address on
Network screen.
®
When performing “Audyssey MultEQ XT
Room Correction and Speaker Setup”, the
measurement fails showing the message
“Ambient noise is too high.”.
• This can be caused by any malfunction in your speaker
unit. Check if the unit produces normal sounds.
• Check the Network settings (page 126).
158
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting—Continued
The following settings can be made for the S-
Video, composite video and COMPONENT
VIDEO inputs
You must use the buttons on the AV receiver to make
these settings.
1. While holding down the input selector button for the
input source that you want to set, press the [SETUP]
button.
Important Note Regarding Video Playback
The AV receiver can upconvert component video, S-
Video, and composite video sources for display on a TV
connected to the HDMI outputs. However, if the picture
quality of the source is poor, upconversion may make the
picture worse or disappear altogether.
In this case, try the following:
2. Use the Left and Right [e]/[r] buttons to change
the setting.
1 If the video source is connected to a component
video input, connect your TV to the
3. Press the input selector button for the input source
that you want to set when you’ve finished.
• Video Attenuation
COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT.
If the video source is connected to an S-Video input,
connect your TV to a MONITOR OUT S.
input, connect your TV to the MONITOR OUT V.
This setting can be made for the DVD/BD, VCR/
DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME, AUX1, or COMPONENT
VIDEO input. (You need to assign the input source
for COMPONENT VIDEO input.)
2 On the main menu, select “1. Input/Output
Select the relevant input selector, and assign it to
“- - - - -” (page 54).
If you have a games console connected to the
S-Video, composite and component video input, and
the picture isn’t very clear, you can attenuate the
gain.
Video ATT:OFF: (default).
Video ATT:ON: Gain is reduced by 2 dB.
3 On the main menu, select “1. Input/Output
Assign”, and then select “3. Component Video
Input” (page 55):
The AV receiver contains a microcomputer for signal pro-
cessing and control functions. In very rare situations,
severe interference, noise from an external source, or
static electricity may cause it to lockup. In the unlikely
event that this happens, unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet, wait at least five seconds, and then plug it
back in again.
If the video source is connected to COMPONENT
VIDEO IN1, select the relevant input selector, and
assign it to “IN1”.
If the video source is connected to COMPONENT
VIDEO IN2, select the relevant input selector, and
assign it to “IN2”.
Onkyo is not responsible for damages (such as CD
rental fees) due to unsuccessful recordings caused by
the unit’s malfunction. Before you record important
data, make sure that the material will be recorded cor-
rectly.
If the video source is connected to COMPONENT
VIDEO IN3, select the relevant input selector, and
assign it to “IN3”.
If the video source is connected to an S-Video input
or composite video input, select the relevant input
selector, and assign it to “- - - - -”.
Before disconnecting the power cord from the wall out-
let, set the AV receiver to Standby.
If “Monitor Out” setting is set to “Analog”, press [VCR/
DVR] and [RETURN] buttons on the AV receiver at the
same time. Select “Skip” in the “VideoProcessor” setting
by pressing the [RETURN] button repeatedly on the dis-
play. To reset back to the original setting, press the same
button at the same time. If you select “Use”, the AV
receiver will output video signals from the video proces-
sor.
159
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications (TX-NR3007)
Amplifier Section
General
Rated Output Power
All channels:
Power Supply
North American:
AC 120 V, 60 Hz
North American:
140 watts minimum continuous
power per channel, 8 ohm loads, 2
channels driven from 20 Hz to 20
kHz, with a maximum total
harmonic distortion of 0.05% (FTC)
160 watts minimum continuous power
per channel, 8 ohm loads, 2 channels
driven at 1 kHz, with a maximum total
harmonic distortion of 0.7% (FTC)
170 watts minimum continuous power
per channel, 6 ohm loads, 2 channels
driven at 1 kHz, with a maximum total
harmonic distortion of 0.1% (FTC)
Others: AC 220 - 240 V, 50/60 Hz
North American: 11.6 A
Others: 1060 W
Power Consumption
Dimensions (W × H × D)
435 × 198.5 × 463.5 mm
17-1/8" × 7-13/16" × 18-1/4"
Weight
25.0 kg (55.1 lbs.)
■ Video Inputs
HDMI
IN1 (DVD/BD), IN2 (VCR/DVR),
IN3 (CBL/SAT), IN4 (GAME),
IN5 (AUX2), IN6, AUX1 (Front)
IN1 (DVD/BD), IN2 (CBL/SAT),
IN3 (GAME)
DVD/BD, VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT,
GAME
DVD/BD, VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT,
GAME, AUX1 (Front)
Others:
9 ch × 200 W at 6 ohms, 1 kHz, 1 ch
Component
S-Video
driven (IEC)
Maximum Output Power
Dynamic Power
Asian:
9 ch × 250 W at 6 ohms, 1 kHz, 1 ch
Composite
driven (JEITA)
320 W (3 Ω, Front)
270 W (4 Ω, Front)
160 W (8 Ω, Front)
■ Video Outputs
HDMI
Component
S-Video
OUT MAIN, OUT SUB
MONITOR OUT
MONITOR OUT,
VCR/DVR (REC OUT)
MONITOR OUT,
THD (Total Harmonic Distortion)
0.05%
Damping Factor
60 (Front, 1 kHz, 8 Ω)
Input Sensitivity and Impedance
Composite
200 mV/47 kΩ (LINE)
2.5 mV/47 kΩ, (PHONO MM)
Output Level and Impedance
VCR/DVR (REC OUT), ZONE 2 OUT
■ Audio Inputs
200 mV/470 Ω (REC OUT)
70 mV (MM 1 kHz 0.5%)
5 Hz - 100 kHz/+1 dB - 3 dB (LINE)
10 dB, 50 Hz (BASS)
10 dB, 20 kHz (TREBLE)
110 dB (LINE, IHF-A)
80 dB (PHONO, IHF-A)
4 Ω - 16 Ω
Digital Inputs
Optical: 2 (Rear), 1 (Front)
Coaxial: 3 (Rear)
MULTI CH, DVD/BD, VCR/DVR,
CBL/SAT, GAME, AUX2, TV/TAPE,
CD, PHONO, AUX1 (Front)
Phono Overload
Frequency Response
Tone Control
Analog Inputs
Signal to Noise Ratio
Multichannel Inputs
7.1
■ Audio Outputs
Speaker Impedance
Analog Outputs
VCR/DVR, TV/TAPE, ZONE2 PRE
OUT, ZONE3 PRE OUT
Video Section
Multichannel Pre Outputs
9
Input Sensitivity/Output Level and Impedance
1 Vp-p/75 (Component and S-Video Y)
0.7 Vp-p/75 (Component PB/CB, PR/CR
Ω
Subwoofer Pre Outputs
Speaker Outputs
2
Ω
)
FL, FR, C, SL, SR, SBL/Z3L, SBR/
Z3R, LH, RH, LW/Z2L, RW/Z2R
1
0.28 Vp-p/75 Ω (S-Video C)
1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Composite)
Component Video Frequency Response
Phones
5 Hz - 100 MHz - 3 dB
■ Control Terminal
MIC
RS232
Yes
1
Tuner Section
Ethernet
IR Input
IR Output
12 V Trigger Out
USB
1
1
1
FM Tuning Frequency Range
North American:
87.5 MHz - 107.9 MHz
Others: 87.5 MHz - 108.0 MHz, RDS
AM Tuning Frequency Range
ZONE2 / ZONE3
Yes (Front)
North American:
530 kHz - 1710 kHz
Others: 522 kHz - 1611 kHz
40
Specifications and features are subject to change without
notice.
Preset Channel
Digital Tuner (North American models only):
SIRIUS
160
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications (TX-NR5007)
Amplifier Section
General
Rated Output Power
All channels:
Power Supply
North American:
AC 120 V, 60 Hz
North American:
145 watts minimum continuous
power per channel, 8 ohm loads, 2
channels driven from 20 Hz to
20 kHz, with a maximum total
harmonic distortion of 0.05% (FTC)
175 watts minimum continuous power
per channel, 8 ohm loads, 2 channels
driven at 1 kHz, with a maximum total
harmonic distortion of 0.7% (FTC)
185 watts minimum continuous power
per channel, 6 ohm loads, 2 channels
driven at 1 kHz, with a maximum total
harmonic distortion of 0.1% (FTC)
Others: AC 220 - 240 V, 50/60 Hz
North American: 12.8 A
Others: 1160 W
Power Consumption
Dimensions (W × H × D)
435 × 198.5 × 463.5 mm
17-1/8" × 7-13/16" × 18-1/4"
Weight
25.0 kg (55.1 lbs.)
■ Video Inputs
HDMI
IN1 (DVD/BD), IN2 (VCR/DVR),
IN3 (CBL/SAT), IN4 (GAME),
IN5 (AUX2), IN6, IN7, AUX1 (Front)
IN1 (DVD/BD), IN2 (CBL/SAT),
IN3 (GAME)
DVD/BD, VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT,
GAME
Others:
9 ch × 220 W at 6 ohms, 1 kHz, 1 ch
Component
S-Video
driven (IEC)
Maximum Output Power
Dynamic Power
Asian:
9 ch × 280 W at 6 ohms, 1 kHz, 1 ch
Composite
DVD/BD, VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT,
GAME, AUX1 (Front)
driven (JEITA)
400 W (3 Ω, Front)
300 W (4 Ω, Front)
180 W (8 Ω, Front)
■ Video Outputs
HDMI
Component
S-Video
OUT MAIN, OUT SUB
MONITOR OUT
MONITOR OUT,
VCR/DVR (REC OUT)
MONITOR OUT,
THD (Total Harmonic Distortion)
0.05 %
Damping Factor
60 (Front, 1 kHz, 8 Ω)
Input Sensitivity and Impedance
Composite
200 mV/47 kΩ (LINE)
2.5 mV/47 kΩ, (PHONO MM)
Output Level and Impedance
VCR/DVR (REC OUT), ZONE 2 OUT
■ Audio Inputs
200 mV/470 Ω (REC OUT)
70 mV (MM 1 kHz 0.5 %)
5 Hz - 100 kHz/+1 dB - 3 dB (Direct
mode)
10 dB, 50 Hz (BASS)
10 dB, 20 kHz (TREBLE)
110 dB (LINE, IHF-A)
80 dB (PHONO, IHF-A)
4 Ω - 16 Ω
Digital Inputs
Optical: 3 (Rear), 1 (Front)
Coaxial: 3 (Rear)
MULTI CH, DVD/BD, VCR/DVR,
CBL/SAT, GAME, AUX2, TV/TAPE,
CD, PHONO, AUX1 (Front)
Phono Overload
Frequency Response
Analog Inputs
Tone Control
Multichannel Inputs
7.1
Signal to Noise Ratio
■ Audio Outputs
Speaker Impedance
Analog Outputs
TV/TAPE, VCR/DVR,
ZONE2 PRE OUT, ZONE3 PRE OUT
Multichannel Pre Outputs
9
Video Section
Input Sensitivity/Output Level and Impedance
1 Vp-p/75 (Component and S-Video Y)
0.7 Vp-p/75 (Component PB/CB, PR/CR
Subwoofer Pre Outputs
Speaker Outputs
2
Ω
Ω
FL, FR, C, SL, SR, SBL/Z3L, SBR/
Z3R, LH, RH, LW/Z2L, RW/Z2R
1
)
0.28 Vp-p/75 Ω (S-Video C)
1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Composite)
Phones
Component Video Frequency Response
■ Control Terminal
5 Hz - 100 MHz - 3 dB
MIC
Yes
RS232
1
1
1
1
Tuner Section
Ethernet
IR Input
IR Output
12 V Trigger Out
USB
FM Tuning Frequency Range
North American:
ZONE2 / ZONE3
Yes (Front and Rear)
87.5 MHz - 107.9 MHz
Others: 87.5 MHz - 108.0 MHz, RDS
AM Tuning Frequency Range
Specifications and features are subject to change without
notice.
North American:
530 kHz - 1710 kHz
Others: 522 kHz - 1611 kHz
40
Preset Channel
Digital Tuner (North American models only):
SIRIUS
161
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Video Resolution Chart
The following tables show how video signals at different resolutions are output by the AV receiver.
✔: Output
NTSC
Output
HDMI
COMPONENT
S-VIDEO COMPOSITE
Input
HDMI
1080p 1080i
720p
✔
480p
✔
480i
1080p 1080i
720p
480p
480i
480i
480i
1080p
1080i
720p
480p
480i
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
1080p
1080i
720p
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
COMPONENT
S-VIDEO
*1
*1
480p
480i
480i
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
*1
*1
*1
*1
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
*1
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
*1
COMPOSITE 480i
✔
*1: The output is limited to 480p for an effective signal in the effect of Macrovision.
PAL
Output
HDMI
COMPONENT
S-VIDEO COMPOSITE
Input
1080p 1080i
720p
✔
576p
✔
576i
1080p 1080i
720p
576p
576i
576i
576i
1080p
1080i
720p
576p
576i
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
HDMI
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
1080p
1080i
720p
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
COMPONENT
S-VIDEO
*2
*2
576p
576i
576i
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
*2
*2
*2
*2
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
*2
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
*2
COMPOSITE 576i
✔
*2: The output is limited to 576p for an effective signal in the effect of Macrovision.
162
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memo
163
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sales & Product Planning Div. : 2-1, Nisshin-cho, Neyagawa-shi, OSAKA 572-8540, JAPAN
Tel: 072-831-8023 Fax: 072-831-8163
ONKYO U.S.A. CORPORATION
18 Park Way, Upper Saddle River, N.J. 07458, U.S.A.
ONKYO EUROPE ELECTRONICS GmbH
Liegnitzerstrasse 6, 82194 Groebenzell, GERMANY
ONKYO EUROPE ELECTRONICS GmbH (UK BRANCH)
The Coach House 81A High Street, Marlow, Buckinghamshire, SL7 1AB, UK
Tel: +44-(0)1628-473-350 Fax: +44(0)-1628-401-700
HOMEPAGE
ONKYO CHINA LIMITED
Unit 1 & 12, 9/F, Tower 1, Ever Gain Plaza, 88, Container Port Road, Kwai Chung,
N.T., Hong Kong. Tel: +86-852-2429-3118 Fax: +86-852-2428-9039
Y0907-1
SN 29400059
(C) Copyright 2009 ONKYO CORPORATION Japan. All rights reserved.
* 2 9 4 0 0 0 5 9 *
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|